Contents

Toyota 4Runner 2006 SUV Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 470
1 of 470

Summary of Content for Toyota 4Runner 2006 SUV Owner's Manual PDF

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

i

Foreword Welcome to the growing group of valueconscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and quality construction of each vehicle we build. This Owners Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and troublefree motoring. For important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully. When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require. If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number: U.S. OWNERS: When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Toyota Customer Experience Center Tollfree:18003314331 Hawaii:

Servco Automotive Customer Services Tollfree:18882725515 CANADIAN OWNERS: When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Tollfree:1888TOYOTA8 or 18888696828 Please leave this Owners Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also. All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyotas policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. Please access our websites for further information. The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com Canada www.toyota.ca

2005 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota Motor Corporation.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

ii

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam- age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to avoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbol shown above, it means: Do not...; Do not do this; or Do not let this happen.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

iii

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to read Section 13 of this Owners Manual carefully. In terms of helping you understand how you can receive the maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides, Section 13 of this Owners Manual is the most important Section for you and your family to read.

Section 13 describes the function and operation concern- ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys- tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you should be aware of. These systems work together along with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of each system is enhanced when it is used properly and together with other systems. No single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the equal level of restraint which these systems can provide when used together. That is why it is important for you and your family to understand the purpose and proper use of each of these systems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the event of a collision. None of these systems, either individ- ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the event of collision. However, the more you know about these systems and how to use them properly, the greater your chances become of surviving an accident without death or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with, and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

iv

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air- bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources of serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the time of deployment. This is just one example of how the instruc- tions in Section 13 of this Owners Manual will help en- sure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and increase the safety they can provide to you and your fami- ly in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section 13 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time of ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer- tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be- sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:

Engine speed

Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

Vehicle speed

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

Position of the transmission selector lever

Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat belts or not

Drivers seat position

Front passengers occupant classification

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

v

SRS airbag deployment data

SRS airbag system diagnostic data

If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control (VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may con- tain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situations which include activating the VSC under which the VSC EDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR may record some or all of the following information:

Behavior of the vehicle

Steering wheel angle

Vehicle speed

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

To what extent the brake pedal was applied

To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of the 4 wheels

Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

An agreement from the vehicles owner (or the leas- ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

Officially requested by the police or other authorities

Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance

Disclose the data to a third party for research pur- poses without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary

Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi- cation information to a nonToyota organization for research purposes

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

vi

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited warranties:

New vehicle warranty

Emission control systems warranty

Others

For further information, please refer to the Owners Warranty Information Booklet or Owners Manual Supplement.

Your responsibility for maintenance

It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the speci- fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in- formation, please refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

Important health and safety information about your Toyota

CAUTION

WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu- ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo- nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de- fects and other reproductive harm. In addition, oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear con- tain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

vii

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of nongenuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod- ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with nongenuine Toyota products. Modification with nongenuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi- tion, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of your Toyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require- ments of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Standard.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

viii

Installation of a mobile twoway radio system

As the installation of a mobile twoway radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as fol- lows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precau- tionary measures or special instructions regarding installa- tion.

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

SRS airbag system

Seat belt pretensioner system

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

AUTO LSD system (twowheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system

Rear height control air suspension

Tire pressure warning system

Cruise control system

Antilock brake system

Electronic throttle control system

Tires and loading on your Toyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the excess load may result in the deterioration of steering ability and braking ability, leading to an accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi- cally and be sure to keep the load limits given in this Owners Manual. For details about tire inflation pressure and load limits, see pages 425 and 350.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

ix

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they are, it may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten- sioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your vehicle.

Onpavement and offroad driving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility ve- hicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is designed for offroad use also. In addition, this vehicle has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design fea- ture causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rol- lover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sure to read Offroad vehicle precau- tions on page 328 in Section 2 and Offroad driving pre- cautions on page 359 in Section 3.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

x

Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This check is done approximately five hours after the engine is turned off. So you may hear sound coming from under- neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. It does not indicate a malfunction.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Overview of instruments and controls Instrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 1

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

2

1. Side vents

2. Side defroster outlets

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center vents

5. Personal lights

6. Electric moon roof switch

7. Garage door opener

8. Auxiliary boxes

9. Glove box

10. Automatic transmission selector lever

11. Power door lock switches

12. Power window switches

13. Seat heater switches

14. Rear height control air suspension switch

15. Rear vents

16. Trash holder

17. Toyota electronic modulated suspension mode select switch

18. Downhill assist control switch

19. Front cup holders

20. Tilt steering lock release lever

Instrument panel overview

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

3

21. Telescopic steering lock release lever

22. Parking brake pedal

23. Window lock switch

24. Power rear view mirror control switches

Rear console box

1. Power outlet (12 VDC)

2. Power outlet (115 VAC)

3. AUX adapter

4. A/V input adapter

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

4

1. Driving position memory switches

2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog light switches

3. Wiper and washer switches

4. Power back window switch

5. Audio system/rear view monitor system and navigation system including audio system (For the navigation system, see the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.)

6. Front passengers seat belt reminder light

7. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent system indicator light

8. Front passenger occupant classification indicator light

9. Multiinformation display

10. Emergency flasher switch

11. Air conditioning controls

12. Auxiliary box

13. Back window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch

14. Fourwheel drive control switch knob (fulltime fourwheel drive models) or multimode control switch knob (multimode fourwheel drive models)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

5

15. Ignition switch

16. Cruise control switch

17. Hood lock release lever

18. Fuel filler door opener

19. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch

20. AUTO LSD switch

21. Center differential lock switch

22. Power outlet main switch

23. Instrument panel light control dial

1. Volume control switches for audio system/handsfree system (For the handsfree system, see the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.)

2. switch

3. MODE switch

4. Telephone switches (See the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.)

5. Speech command switch (See the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.)

Steering switches

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

6

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Service reminder indicators and indicator lights

4. Fuel gauge

5. Low fuel level warning light

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer and two trip meters

Instrument cluster overview Type A

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

7

1. Service reminder indicators and indicator lights

2. Tachometer

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Low fuel level warning light

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer and two trip meters

Type B

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

8

or

Drivers seat belt reminder light1

Low engine oil pressure warning light1

Engine oil replacement reminder light1 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light1

Malfunction indicator lamp1

Charging system warning light1

Antilock brake system warning light1

SRS warning light1

Open door warning light1

Front passengers seat belt reminder light1

Vehicle stability control system warning light1

Traction control system warning light1

(twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system warning light1

(fourwheel drive models)

AUTO LSD system warning light1

(twowheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system warning light1 (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system warning light1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light1 (fourwheel drive models)

Low tire pressure warning light1

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

9

Center differential lock indicator light3

(fourwheel drive models)

Automatic transmission indicator lights

Slip indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Low speed fourwheel drive indicator light3

(fourwheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system indicator light (fourwheel drive models)

Headlight high beam indicator light

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent system indicator light

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light2

Headlight low beam indicator light

Tail light indicator light

AUTO LSD indicator light (twowheel drive models)

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light1 (for vehicles sold in Canada)

Front passenger occupant classification indicator light

Vehicle stability control system off indicator light (fourwheel drive models)

Fourwheel drive indicator light3

(multimode fourwheel drive models)

Front fog light indicator light

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

10

1: For details, see Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers on page 147 in Section 16.

2: For details, see Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch on page 95 in Section 13.

3: If this light flashes, see Fourwheel drive system on page 164 in Section 17.

4: If this light flashes, see Rear height control air suspension on page 184 in Section 17.

5: If this light flashes, see Cruise control on page 195 in Section 17.

Cruise control indicator light5

Height control OFF indicator light4

Height control indicator lights

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

11

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Keys and Doors Keys 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobilizer system 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power back window 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 2

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

12

Your vehicle is supplied with the two kinds of keys.

1. Master keys (black)These keys work in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will need one of them to make a new key with a builtin transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)This key does not work in the glove box.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizer system has been placed in the head of the master and sub keys. These chips are needed to enable the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.

To protect items locked in the glove box when using valet parking, leave the sub key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with- out a key, you should always carry a spare key in case you accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans- ponder chip, observe the following precautions:

When starting the engine, do not use the key with a key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the key ring against the key grip. Otherwise the engine may not start, or may stop soon after it starts.

Keys

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

13

When starting the engine, do not use the key with other transponder keys around (including keys of oth- er vehicles) and do not press other key plates against the key grip. Otherwise the engine may not start, or may stop soon after it starts. If this happens, remove the key once and then insert it again after remov- ing other transponder keys (includ- ing keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while gripping or covering them with your hand to start the engine.

Do not bend the key grip.

Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off electromagnet- ic waves.

Do not knock the key hard against other objects.

Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard and hood under direct sunlight.

Do not put the key in water or wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

Do not use the key with electromag- netic materials.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

14

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys, duplicates can be made by a Toyota dealer using the key number.

We recommend writing down the key num- ber and storing it in a safe place.

The engine immobilizer system is a theft prevention system. When you in- sert the key in the ignition switch, the transponder chip in the keys head transmits an electronic code to the ve- hicle. The engine will start only when the electronic code in the chip corre- sponds to the registered ID code for the vehicle.

The system is automatically set when the key is removed from the ignition switch. The indicator light will start flashing to show the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditions occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

The indicator light stays on except when the theft deterrent system is set- ting or activating. (See Theft deterrent system on page 35 in this Section.)

The indicator light does not start flash- ing when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

The indicator light flashes inconsistent- ly.

Engine immobilizer system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

15

Inserting the registered key in the ignition switch automatically cancels the system, which enables the engine to start. The indicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you a new key with builtin transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and master key. However, there is a limit to the number of additional keys your Toyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the sys- tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas- semble the engine immobilizer sys- tem. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, proper opera- tion of the system cannot be guaran- teed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- ing interference that may cause unde- sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equip- ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1. LOCK switch

2. UNLOCK switch

3. Back window open switch

4. PANIC switch

Wireless remote control

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

16

The wireless remote control system is designed to lock or unlock all the side doors and back door, open the back window or activate the PANIC mode from a distance within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push it slowly and securely.

The wireless remote control transmitter is an electronic component. Observe the fol- lowing instructions in order not to cause damage to the transmitter.

Do not leave the transmitter in places where the temperature becomes high such as on the dashboard.

Do not disassemble it.

Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.

Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con- trol transmitters for the same vehicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If the wireless remote control transmitter does not actuate the doors, back window or alarm, operate from a normal distance:

Check for closeness to a radio trans- mitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

The battery may have been consumed. Check the battery in the transmitter. To replace the battery, see Replacing battery on page 20.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an acci- dent. (See If you lose your wireless re- mote control transmitter on page 395 in Section 4.)

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

Locking and unlocking doors

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

17

To lock and unlock all the side doors and back door, push the switches of the transmitter slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the LOCK switch. All the side doors and back door are locked si- multaneously. At this time one beep will be heard, and the turn signal lights flash once.

Check to see that all the side doors and back door are securely locked.

If any of the side doors or the back door is not securely closed, locking cannot be performed by the LOCK switch and a beep will sound continuously for 10 sec- onds. However, if the key is in the ignition switch, a beep will not sound.

To stop the buzzer, close all the side doors and back door securely or push the UNLOCK switch.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the UNLOCK switch once to unlock the drivers door alone. Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds unlocks all the side doors and back door simultaneously. Each time the UNLOCK switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard, and the turn signal lights flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all the side doors and back door can be changed to a single switch operation. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the UNLOCK switch is pressed, the interior light, luggage compartment light, ignition switch light and running board lights (on some models) will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out. (For details, see Interi- or light on page 136, Luggage compart- ment light on page 138, Ignition switch light on page 139 and Running board lights on page 140 in Section 15.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless remote unlock feature. If a door is not opened by then, all the side doors and back door will be automati- cally locked again.

The timing for the automatic door lock function can be changed. For details, con- tact your Toyota dealer.

If the LOCK or UNLOCK switch is kept pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera- tion is not repeated. Release the switch and then push again.

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the wireless door locking or unlocking function

Cancelling the flash of the turn signal lights

Changing the volume of beep sound

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

18

To open the back window, push the back window open switch of the trans- mitter for about 1 second. The window will fully open.

At this time, you can hear a beep.

If the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion, the back window cannot be opened by the back window open switch.

To open the back window with the key, see Power back window on page 30 in this Section.

The back window opening program by wireless remote control can be changed or disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Pushing the PANIC switch blows the horn intermittently and flashes the headlights, tail lights and turn signal lights, and turns on the interior and luggage compartment lights.

The PANIC switch is used to deter ve- hicle theft when you witness anyone at- tempting to break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop alarm midway, push any of the switch on the wireless remote control transmitter. You can also stop the alarm by turning the ignition key from the LOCK to ON position.

The PANIC mode does not work when the ignition key is in the ON position.

This alarm function can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Opening back window Activating panic mode

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

19

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- ing interference that may cause unde- sired operation.

NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec- tion against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc- tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer- ence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is en- couraged to try to correct the interfer- ence by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving an- tenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equip- ment.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

20

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre- vent small children from swallowing the removed transmitter battery or components.

NOTICE

When replacing the transmitter bat- tery, be careful not to lose the com- ponents.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Toyota dealer.

Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow- ing these procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the transmitter case.

Replacing battery

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

21

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat- tery by ballpoint pen.

Insert the tip of ballpoint pen at the guide groove and lift as shown in the above illustration.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

3. Put in a new transmitter battery with positive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

Make sure the positive side and negative side of the transmitter bat- tery are faced correctly.

Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause unexpected rust.

Do not touch or move any compo- nents inside the transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.

Be careful not to bend the electrode when inserting the transmitter bat- tery and that dust or oils do not adhere to the transmitter case.

Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the transmitter operates properly. If the trans- mitter still does not operate properly, con- tact your Toyota dealer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

22

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn it.

To lock: Turn the key forward. To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock and unlock simultaneously with the drivers door. In the drivers door lock, turning the key once will unlock the drivers door and twice in succession will unlock all the side doors and back door simultaneously.

This double key turning operation to un- lock all the side doors and back door can be changed to a single key turning opera- tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal- er.

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked with a key, the interior light, luggage compartment light, ignition switch light and running board lights (on some models) will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out. (For details, see Interior light on page 136, Luggage compartment light on page 138, Ignition switch light on page 139 and Running board lights on page 140 in Section 15.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward. To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles even if the lock knobs are in the locked position.

Side doors

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

23

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur. Toyota strongly recommends that all children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the lock position will also lock the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the ve- hicle.

The front doors cannot be locked if you leave the key in the ignition switch.

Drivers side

Front passengers side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the front side. To unlock: Push the switch down on the rear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locks or unlocks all the side doors and back door.

If you do either of the following, no side door or back door can be unlocked with the power door lock switch.

Lock all the side doors and back door with the key or wireless remote control transmitter when all the side doors and back door are closed.

Open the drivers door or front passen- gers door and move the inside lock knobs of both front doors to the lock position, then close the front doors.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

24

The power door lock switch can be reset in the following ways.

Turn the ignition key to ON.

Unlock all the side doors and back door with the key or wireless remote control transmitter.

Unlock the drivers door or front pas- sengers door with the inside lock knob, and then unlock all the side doors and back door with the power door lock switch.

This unlocking protection with the power door lock switch can be disabled. For de- tails, contact your Toyota dealer. REAR DOOR CHILDPROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the LOCK position as shown on the label.

When the childprotector is locked, you cannot open the rear door by the inside door handle. We recommend using this feature whenever small children are in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors are closed and locked, especially when small children are in the ve- hicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown out from the ve- hicle in an accident. It also helps pre- vent the doors from being opened unintentionally.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

25

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING

You can select the following functions:

Locking linked with the shift position

All doors are automatically locked when the selector lever is moved out of P position.

Locking linked with vehicle speed

All doors are automatically locked when the vehicle speed goes above about 20 km/h (12 mph).

You can set or cancel the automatic door locking functions:

Be sure to apply the parking brake when performing the following operations.

To select the locking linked with the shift position:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Shift the selector lever to the P posi- tion.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni- tion switch to the ON position, press and hold the drivers side power door lock switch in the lock position for 5 seconds and then release.

The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op- eration again.

To select the locking linked with the vehicle speed:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Shift the selector lever from P to the N position.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni- tion switch to the ON position, press and hold the drivers side power door lock switch in the lock position for 5 seconds and then release.

The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op- eration again.

Automatic door locking and unlocking functions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

26

AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING

You can select the following functions:

Unlocking linked with the shift posi- tion

All doors are automatically unlocked when the selector lever is moved to P position.

Unlocking linked with the ignition switch

All doors are automatically unlocked when the drivers door is opened within 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK posi- tion, or the key is removed.

You can set or cancel the automatic door unlocking functions:

Be sure to apply the parking brake when performing the following operations.

To select the unlocking linked with the shift position:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Shift the selector lever to the P posi- tion.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni- tion switch to the ON position, press and hold the drivers side power door lock switch in the unlock position for 5 seconds and then release.

The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op- eration again.

To select the unlocking linked with the ignition switch:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Shift the selector lever from P to the N position.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni- tion switch to the ON position, press and hold the drivers side power door lock switch in the unlock position for 5 seconds and then release.

The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op- eration again.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

27

The windows can be operated with the switch on each side door.

The power windows work when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Key off operation: If both front doors are closed, all the power windows work for 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned off. It stops working when either front door is opened.

The indicator light (AUTO) on the switch tells you the switch can be operated.

OPERATING THE DRIVERS WINDOW

Use the switch on the drivers door.

Normal operation: The window moves as long as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch. To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Automatic operation: Push the switch completely down or pull it completely up, and then release it. The window will fully open or close. To stop the window part- way, lightly move the switch in the oppo- site direction and then release it.

Jam protection function: During automat- ic closing operation or key off closing op- eration, the window stops and opens half way if something gets caught between the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

Power windows

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

28

If the battery is disconnected or run down, the power window may not operate automatically and the jam protection func- tion will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normal- ize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switch and lower the window halfway.

2. Pull up the switch until the window closes and hold the switch for a sec- ond.

Make sure that the window opens and closes automatically. If the power window cannot be operated properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally, as it could re- sult in a serious injury.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully closed.

Window lock switch

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

29

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passengers door or the switches on the drivers door that control each passengers win- dow.

The window moves as long as you hold the switch.

To open: Push down the switch. To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch on the drivers door, the passengers windows cannot be operated.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

Before you close the power win- dows, always make sure there is nobody around the power windows. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someones neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in death or serious in- jury. When anyone closes the power windows, make sure he or she op- erates the windows safely.

When small children are in the ve- hicle, never let them use the power window switches without supervi- sion. Use the window lock switch to prevent them from making unex- pected use of the switches.

Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power window switches and get trapped in a window. Unat- tended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

30

The back window can be operated with the switch on the instrument panel or the key operation in the back door key- hole.

The power back window works when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

You can open the back window when the back window wiper is working. At that time, the wiper stops working until the window is closed again.

If the back window is not fully closed, the back window wiper, washer and defogger will not work. (See Back window wiper and washer on page 141 and Back win- dow and outside rear view mirror defog- gers on page 142 in Section 15.)

If the battery is disconnected or run down, the power back window may not operate automatically and the jam protec- tion function will not function correctly af- ter you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normalize the power back window with the power back window switch.

To normalize the power back window:

1. Push the (down) switch and lower the window halfway.

2. Push the (up) switch until the win- dow closes and hold the switch for a second.

Make sure that the window opens and closes automatically. If the power back window cannot be operated properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

OPERATING FROM INSIDE

The ignition key must be in the ON posi- tion.

Normal operation: To open or close the back window, quickly push and release the (down) or (up) switch.

Automatic operation: To open or close the back window, push and hold the (down) or (up) switch. The window will fully open or close. To stop the win- dow partway, push the switch on either the (down) or (up) side briefly.

Key off operation: If both front doors are closed, it works for 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned off. It stops working when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function: During automat- ic closing operation or key off closing op- eration, the window stops and opens half way if something gets caught between the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

CAUTION

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally, as it could re- sult in a serious injury.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully closed.

Power back window

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

31

If you push in the window lock switch on the drivers door, the back window cannot be operated.

OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE

The back window can be opened and closed with the key operation in the back door keyhole.

To open: Turn the key fully counterclock- wise and hold it.

After the door is unlocked, the window begins to open. To stop the window part- way, release the key.

To close: Turn the key fully clockwise and hold it.

After the door is locked, the window be- gins to close. To stop the window partway, release the key.

This door key linked function can be dis- abled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Jam protection function: During closing operation, the window stops and opens half way if something gets caught between the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

32

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

Before you close the power back window, always make sure there is nobody around the power back win- dow. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someones neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in death or serious in- jury. When anyone closes the power back window, make sure he or she operates the window safely.

When small children are in the ve- hicle, never let them use the power back window switch without super- vision. Use the window lock switch to prevent them from making unex- pected use of the switch.

Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power back window switch and get trapped in a window. Unat- tended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.

Keep the back window closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally, as it could re- sult in a serious injury.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully closed.

To open the back window with the wire- less remote control transmitter, see Opening back window on page 18 in this Section.

To open the back door, push up the back door opener.

The back door can be opened when the vehicle is stopped.

If the back door opener does not operate except when the battery is disconnected or run down, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the battery is disconnected or run down, the back door does not open after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normalize the back door.

Back door

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

33

To normalize the back door, unlock it with the key, remote control transmitter or pow- er door lock switch, see Locking and unlocking doors on page 16 and Side doors on page 22 in this Section.

Make sure that the back door opens. If the back door cannot be opened properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

The back door can be locked or unlocked in the following ways.

All the side doors and back door lock and unlock simultaneously with the back door. Insert the key into the key- hole, turn it clockwise to lock and turn it counterclockwise to unlock.

Operate the power door lock switch. (See Side doors on page 22 in this Section.)

Operate the wireless remote control. (See Locking and unlocking doors on page 16 in this Section.)

All the side doors and back door are locked and unlocked simultaneously with the drivers door. (See Side doors on page 22 in this Section.)

If the battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the back door will be auto- matically locked. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.

When all the side doors and back door are unlocked simultaneously with a key, the interior light, luggage compartment light, ignition switch light and running board lights (on some models) will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out. (For details, see Interi- or light on page 136, Luggage compart- ment light on page 138, Ignition switch light on page 139 and Running board lights on page 140 in Section 15.)

The back window can be opened and closed with the key operation in the back door keyhole. (For details, see Power back window on page 30 in this Section.) When closing the back door, the inside

strap can be used to make the reach easier.

To close the back door, lower it and press down on it. After closing the back door, try pulling it up to make sure it is secure- ly closed.

Back door closer: When the back door has not been fully closed, it is automati- cally closed completely.

See Stowage precautions on page 351 in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

34

CAUTION

Keep the back window and back door closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out but also prevents ex- haust gases from entering the ve- hicle.

Careful attention is needed so as not to get your fingers trapped as the back door automatically closes when it has not been fully closed.

Never allow a child to operate the back door.

NOTICE

To avoid damage to the back door dampers, do not apply any force, paint or let any other foreign matter on them.

Do not apply excessive force when the back door closer is operating. Otherwise, the back door closer may become defective.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hood is closed and securely locked. Other- wise, the hood may open unexpected- ly while driving and an accident may occur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make sure it locks into place. If necessary, press down gently on the front edge to lock it.

Hood

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

35

To deter vehicle theft, the system is designed to sound an alarm if any of the side doors, back door or hood is forcibly unlocked or opened or the bat- tery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected when the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittently and flashes the headlights, tail lights and turn signal lights, and turns on the interior and luggage compartment lights.

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing when the key is removed from the ignition switch. (See Engine immobilizer system on page 14 in this Section for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, back door and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when all the side doors, back door and hood are closed and locked.

The system will automatically be set after 30 seconds. When the system is set, the indicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator light starts flashing, you may leave the ve- hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when you set the system, because unlocking from the inside will activate the system.

CANCELING THE SYSTEM

The system will cancel under the any of the following conditions:

Any of the side doors, back door or hood is opened.

Any of the side doors or the back door is unlocked.

The key is inserted into the ignition.

The battery terminal is reconnected.

Theft deterrent system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

36

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm under the following conditions:

If any of the side doors is unlocked or opened without the key or wireless re- mote control transmitter, or if the back door or hood is forcibly opened.

If the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected.

If the ignition is hotwired.

The indicator light will come on when the system is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and the key is not in the ignition switch, all the side doors and back door will relock au- tomatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automati- cally stop and the indicator light will starts flashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resets the alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under the same circumstances described in Activating the system.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the following these ways:

Unlock any of the side doors or the back door with the key or wireless re- mote control transmitter.

Turn the ignition key from the LOCK to ON position.

These ways cancel the system at the same time.

If the battery becomes discharged due to the vehicle being unused for a long time, etc., when the battery is recharged or replaced, the system will give the alarm. If this happens, immediately unlock any of the side doors or the back door with the key or the wireless remote con- trol transmitter, and the alarm will stop.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above. The side doors and back door should be locked with the key or wireless re- mote control transmitter. Be sure to wait until the indicator light goes off or starts flashing.

3. Unlock any side door from the inside. The system should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the other doors and hood. When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated when the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

37

This indicates that the fuel filler door is on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the lever.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al- low open flames when refueling. The fumes are flammable.

When opening the cap, do not re- move the cap quickly. In hot weath- er, fuel under pressure could cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the cap is suddenly re- moved.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap counterclockwise by 90 de- grees (to the pressure point 1), and then turn it an additional 30 degrees (to point 2). Pause slightly before removing it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is opened.

Fuel tank cap

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

38

3. The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks point to the left and right or up and down, and set it in the receptacle on the back side of the door.

When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click. When you hear the click, the cap is fully closed.

If the cap is not installed securely, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Make sure the cap is installed se- curely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap for replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, apply force only in the turning direction to the cap. Do not pull or pry it.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

39

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use the switch beside the personal lights.

The moon roof works when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The sun shade can be opened or closed by hand.

Sliding operation

To open: Push the switch on the SLIDE OPEN side.

The roof will fully open automatically. To stop the roof partway, push the switch on either the SLIDE OPEN or TILT UP side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the switch, the moon roof will open while the switch is being pushed and stop when released.

The sun shade will be opened together with the roof.

When the moon roof is opened fully, the deflector will raise to reduce the entering of the strong wind. The angle of the de- flector will be adjusted according to the vehicle speed.

To close: Push the switch on the TILT UP side.

The roof will fully close automatically. To stop the roof partway, push the switch on either the SLIDE OPEN or TILT UP side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the switch, the moon roof will close while the switch is being pushed and stop when released.

Tilting operation

To tilt up: Push the switch on the TILT UP side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To stop the roof partway, push the switch on either the SLIDE OPEN or TILT UP side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the switch, the moon roof will tilt up while the switch is being pushed and stop when released.

To tilt down: Push the switch on the SLIDE OPEN side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically. To stop the roof partway, push the switch on either the SLIDE OPEN or TILT UP side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the switch, the moon roof will tilt down while the switch is being pushed and stop when released.

Electric moon roof

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

40

Key off operation: If both front doors are closed, it works for 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned off. It stops working when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function:

If something gets caught between the moon roof and frame during slide clos- ing operation, the moon roof stops and opens half way, and the deflector stops and raises fully.

If something gets caught between the moon roof and frame during tilting down operation, the moon roof stops and opens fully.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

If the battery is disconnected or run down, the moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam protection func- tion will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normal- ize the moon roof.

To normalize the moon roof, push and hold the switch on the TILT UP side until the moon roof tilts all the way up and then tilts down a little automatically.

Make sure that the moon roof opens and closes automatically. If the moon roof can- not be operated properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants away from the roof opening. Other- wise, they could be seriously in- jured if the vehicle stops suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

Before you close the moon roof, always make sure there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and other parts of the body in the roof opening. If someones neck, head or hands get caught in the closing roof, it could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe to do so.

Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the moon roof switch and get trapped in the roof opening. Unat- tended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.

Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof opening.

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally, as it could re- sult in a serious injury.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof is fully closed.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

41

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Occupant restraint systems Seats 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving position memory system 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heaters 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS airbags 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 3

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

42

While the vehicle is being driven, all ve- hicle occupants should have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and prop- erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are properly seated. Do not allow any passengers to sit on top of a foldeddown seatback, or in the luggage compartment or car- go area. Persons not properly seated and/or not properly re- strained by seat belts can be se- verely injured in the event of emer- gency braking or a collision.

During driving, do not allow any passengers to stand up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 5075 mm (23 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in sever- al ways:

Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, sim- ply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, nonslippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air- bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec- ommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

Seats Front seats Front seat precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

43

Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury es- pecially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passen- ger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed in the driver and front passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.

Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag inflates with consid- erable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously in- jured.

Do not use seat accessories which cover the area where the side air- bags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from acti- vating correctly, causing death or serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of the seats with side airbags. Such change may prevent the side airbag system from activat- ing correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate ac- cidentally, resulting in death or seri- ous injury.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger or luggage.

After adjusting the seat position, re- lease the lever and try sliding the seat forward and backward to make sure it is locked in position.

After adjusting the seatback, push your body back against the seat to make sure the seat is locked in position.

Do not put objects under the seats. Otherwise, the objects may interfere with the seatlock mechanism or unexpectedly push up the seat posi- tion adjusting lever and the seat may suddenly move, causing the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Seat adjustment precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

44

While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. Otherwise, your hands or fingers may be caught and injured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull it up. Then slide the seat to the desired position with slight body pressure and release the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTING KNOB (drivers seat only)

To change the angle of the seat cush- ion on the front side, turn the knob either way.

3. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER (drivers seat only)

To change the height of the seat, pull up or push down the lever.

4. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up. Then lean back to the desired angle and release the lever.

Adjusting front seats (manual seat)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

45

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts pro- vide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply re- straint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoul- der belt. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is re- clined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.

5. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT ADJUSTING SWITCH (drivers seat only)

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is pushed.

1. DRIVERS SEAT: SEAT POSITION, SEAT CUSHION ANGLE AND SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING SWITCH

PASSENGERS SEAT: SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat at that position.

Do not place anything under the front seats, as this might interfere with the seat movement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat- back at that position.

Adjusting front seats (power seat)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

46

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts pro- vide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply re- straint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoul- der belt. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is re- clined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT ADJUSTING SWITCH (drivers seat only)

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is pushed.

1. Remove the head restraint. Hold the center of the lever and pull it up. Then slide the seat further forward than the frontmost lock position.

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le- ver to unlock and push down the seatback.

When returning the seatback upright, be careful not to make yourself hit by the seatback which will bound with consid- erable spring force.

After returning the seat to its original position, be certain to replace the head restraint.

Flattening seatbacks (manual seat)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

47

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on the flattened seat while driving; use the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try pushing the seat and seatback for- ward and rearward to make sure it is secured in place. Be certain to replace the head restraint.

1. Remove the head restraint. Push the seat position adjusting switch for- ward to slide the seat further for- ward than the frontmost position.

2. Move the seatback angle adjusting switch backward to flatten the seat- back.

After returning the seat to its original position, be certain to replace the head restraint.

Flattening seatbacks (power seat)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

48

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on the flattened seat while driving; use the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try pushing the seat and seatback for- ward and rearward to make sure it is secured in place. Be certain to replace the head restraint.

This system can memorize the position of the drivers seat and recall it at the touch of a button.

Buttons 1 and 2 can memorize two separate positions.

SETTING THE DRIVING POSITION

The ignition key must be in the ON posi- tion and the selector lever is in the P position.

1. Adjust the drivers seat to the de- sired position.

2. While pushing the SET button, push button 1 or 2 until a beep is heard.

The system can memorize up to 2 posi- tions by repeating the above steps. If step 2 is performed when both buttons 1 and 2 are memorized, the previous position will be erased and a new position will be set.

Driving position memory system (on some models)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

49

To make only slight changes to an already memorized position, the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then make the desired changes and perform step 2 above.

RECALLING THE MEMORIZED POSITION

When you push button 1 or 2, a beep will sound and the driving posi- tion will be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for that button.

The memorized position can be recalled under the following conditions:

The ignition key is in the ON position and the selector lever is in the P position.

The ignition key is turned to the LOCK position or the key is not in the ignition switch, and less than 30 seconds have passed since opening the drivers door.

To stop the operation, push any driving position memory button.

To reactivate the system, push the button 1 or 2 again.

If the vehicles battery is disconnected, the memory will be erased and the posi- tions will have to be set again.

CAUTION

Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are being made.

Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat could strike the rear passenger or hit your body against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can stop the move- ment by pressing another driving position memory switch.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

50

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEAT

Stow the rear center seat belt buckle as shown in the illustration.

This prevents the seat belt buckle from falling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckle must be stowed before you fold the seatback.

If you are using a trash holder, lower it.

1. Lower the head restraint to the lowe- st position.

Rear seats Folding down rear seats (vehicles without third seats)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

51

2. Swing the bottom cushion up by pulling the lock release strap.

Each bottom cushion can be swung up separately.

3. Push the lock release button and fold down the seatback.

This will enlarge the luggage compartment as far as the raised seat cushion. See Stowage precautions on page 351 in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

Each seatback can be folded separately.

WHEN RETURNING THE SEATBACK

If you cannot raise the seatback because of the locked seat belt, do not try to force it. Release the lock of the seat belt in the following way.

1. Push in the lower front edge of the seatback to slacken the seat belt.

2. Let the seat belt retract a little.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

52

CAUTION

When returning seats to their original position, observe the following pre- cautions in order to prevent personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:

Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rear- ward on the top of the seatback. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback and are arranged in their proper position and are ready to use.

Make sure the bottom cushion is securely locked by trying to pull up the edge of the cushion near the lock release straps.

Make sure to arrange the buckles of the seat belts in their proper posi- tion and be ready to use.

CAUTION

Adjustment should not be made while the vehicle is moving.

When adjusting the seat, be careful not to hit the seat against a pas- senger or luggage.

After adjusting the seatback, push back your body to make sure it is locked in position.

When returning seats to their origi- nal position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent per- sonal injury in a collision or sud- den stop:

Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rear- ward on the top of the seatback or by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from oper- ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat and are arranged in their proper position and are ready to use.

The third seats have a maximum capacity of two belted occupants who do not exceed 150 cm (59 in.) in height. Exceeding these limits can result in increased risk of seri- ous personal injuries or death.

Folding the seats up will enlarge the lug- gage compartment. See Stowage pre- cautions on page 351 in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

Rear seat precautions (vehicles with third seats)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

53

Second seats

Third seats

SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lock release lever. Then lean back to the desired angle and release the lever.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts pro- vide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the passengers are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is re- clined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.

BEFORE TUMBLING SECOND SEATS

Stow the second seat belt buckles as shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from falling out when you tumble the second seat.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowed before you tumble the second seat.

Adjusting rear seats (vehicles with third seats) Tumbling second seats

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

54

TUMBLING SECOND SEATS

Lower the head restraints to the lowest position. Fold down the seatback while pulling the seatback angle adjusting le- ver, then swing the whole seat up and forward until they are locked.

Tumbling the second seats will enlarge the floor space for third seat entry. It will also enlarge the luggage compartment when the third seats are not used. See Stow- age precautions on page 351 in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

WHEN RETURNING SECOND SEATS

Push the knob to unlock the seat, swing the whole seat down and swing the seatback up.

If you cannot raise the seatback because of the locked seat belt, do not try to force it. Release the lock of the seat belt in the following way.

1. Push in the lower front edge of the seatback to slacken the seat belt.

2. Let the seat belt retract a little.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

55

CAUTION

When tumbling seats or returning seats to their original positions, ob- serve the following to prevent person- al injury:

Do not tumble or return the seat while the vehicle is moving.

Make sure people or luggage are clear of the seat. Then, hold the seat and slowly move it. Otherwise, people may be injured or luggage may be damaged, if the seat hits them.

Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.

To prevent personal injury in a colli- sion or sudden stop:

Do not sit on or place anything on the folded seatback or tumbled seat while driving.

Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rear- ward on the top of the seatback or by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from oper- ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat and are arranged in their proper position and are ready to use.

BEFORE FOLDING UP THIRD SEATS

1. Stow the third seat belt buckles as shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from falling out when you fold up the third seats.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowed before you fold up the third seats.

Folding up third seats

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

56

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes through the hanger.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being damaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed from the hanger when the seat belt is in use.

FOLDING UP THIRD SEATS

1. Lower the head restraint to the low- est position. Fold down the seatback while pushing the seatback angle ad- justing lever.

Folding up the third seats will enlarge the luggage compartment. See Stowage precautions on page 351 in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

2. Unlock the seat leg by pulling the handle behind the seat, and swing the whole seat up and sideward.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

57

3. Stow the seat leg in the back of the seat cushion. Take the holding strap out of its holder, and attach the strap to the assist grip. Tighten the strap by pulling the end and fix it with Velcro.

CAUTION

When folding up the third seats, fix the seats securely by adjusting the length of the holding strap. Failure to do so may cause an unexpected inju- ry in the event of emergency braking or collision.

4. Remove the seat anchor covers from the back of the seat cushion, and install them over the seat anchors.

CAUTION

Be sure to apply the covers on the seat anchors, or you may get burned when they become hot.

When returning the third seat to its origi- nal position, stow the holding strap in the holder in the direction shown above. Then do the above procedures in the reverse order.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

58

CAUTION

When folding up seats or returning seats to their original positions, ob- serve the following to prevent person- al injury:

Do not fold up or return the seat while the vehicle is moving.

Be careful not to hit the seat against a person or drop it on your- self.

To prevent personal injury in a colli- sion or sudden stop:

Do not sit on or place anything on the folded seatback while driving.

Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rear- ward on the top of the seatback or by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from oper- ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat and are arranged in their proper position and are ready to use.

BEFORE REMOVING THIRD SEATS

1. Stow the third seat belt buckles as shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from falling out when you remove the third seats.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowed before you remove the third seats.

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes through the hanger.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being damaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed from the hanger when the seat belt is in use.

Removing third seats

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

59

REMOVING THIRD SEATS

1. Lower the head restraint to the low- est position. Fold down the seatback while pushing the seatback angle ad- justing lever.

2. Unlock the seat leg by pulling the handle behind the seat, and lift the whole seat up. Retract the seat leg into the back of the seat cushion. Then, place the seat on the floor.

3. Remove the cover and push the seat lock release lever outward to unlock the seat lock, then pull up the whole seat and remove it. After removing the seat, reinstall the cover.

Removing the third seats will enlarge the luggage compartment. See Stowage precautions on page 351 in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

NOTICE

Avoid putting heavy loads on the re- moved seat. The metallic tips of the seat leg may be damaged and the seat cannot be reinstalled.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

60

4. Remove the seat anchor covers from the back of the seat cushion, and install them over the seat anchors.

CAUTION

Be sure to apply the covers on the seat anchors, or you may get burned when they become hot.

REINSTALLING THIRD SEATS

1. Remove the seat anchor covers from the floor and install them in the back of the seat cushion. Hold the seat and engage the seat striker to the seat lock, then place the seat on the floor. Press down the seatback to securely lock the seat to the body.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

61

2. Pull out the seat leg from the back of the seat cushion and lock it on the anchor. Reinstall the cover.

3. Raise the seatback while pushing down the seatback angle adjusting lever.

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling the seat, observe the following to prevent personal injury:

Do not fold or remove the seat while the vehicle is moving.

Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.

Be careful not to hit the removed seat against a person or drop it on yourself.

When reinstalling the seat, be care- ful not to hit the seat against your- self or the vehicle.

To prevent personal injury in a colli- sion or sudden stop:

Do not sit on or place anything on the folded seatback while driving.

Do not leave the removed seat un- secured in the vehicle.

Do not try to sit on or place any- thing on the removed seat.

Reinstall each seat in its original position. Failure to do so will pre- vent third seat occupants from us- ing seat belts properly.

Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rear- ward on the top of the seatback or by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from oper- ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat and are arranged in their proper position and are ready to use.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

62

Front seats

Rear seatsvehicles without third seats

Second seatsvehicles with third seats

Third seats

For your safety and comfort, adjust the head restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up. To lower: Push it down while pressing the lock release button.

Front head restraintsYou can also move the head restraint forward or backward. If such adjustment is desired, pull or push the base of the head restraint.

Rear head restraints (vehicles without third seats) and a second center head restraint (vehicles with third seats)When an occupant sits on the rear seat (ve- hicles without third seats) or second cen- ter seat (vehicles with third seats), always pull up the rear head restraint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recom- mended.

Head restraints

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

63

CAUTION

Adjust the center of the head re- straint so that it is closest to the top of your ears.

After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position.

Do not drive with the head re- straints removed.

To use the armrest, pull it out as shown above.

This armrest is equipped with cup holders and tray. (For details, see Rear cup hold- ers and tray on page 318 or Rear cup holders on page 320 in Section 110.)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest, avoid putting heavy loads on it.

To turn on the seat heater, move the dial forward (L dial for the left front seat and R dial for the right front seat). At this time, the indicator light will illuminate to indicate the seat heat- er is operating.

To turn off the seat heater, move the dial backward until it stops.

Move the dial forward or backward to ad- just to the desired temperature. When the seat heater is not in use, move the dial fully backward.

The key must be in the ON position.

Armrest Seat heaters

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

64

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op- erating the seat heater because it may make them feel too hot or cause burns at low temperatures (erythema, varicella). Use extra caution for;

Babies, small children, elderly per- sons, sick persons or persons with physical disabilities

Persons who have sensitive skin

Persons who are exhausted

Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, do not use the seat heater with a blan- ket, cushion, or other insulating ob- jects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

Do not put unevenly weighed ob- jects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

When cleaning the seats, do not use organic substances (paint thin- ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat surface.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the system off when the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the vehicle be properly re- strained at all times with the seat belts provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury and/or the severity of injury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap- propriate for the child until the child be- comes large enough to properly wear the vehicles seat belts. See Child restraint on page 96 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicles seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn properly. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn properly, the force of the rapid infla- tion of the airbag may cause death or serious injury to the child.

Seat belts Seat belt precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

65

Do not allow any children to stand up or kneel on either rear or front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious in- jury or death during emergency braking or a collision. Also, do not let the child sit on your lap. Holding a child in your arms does not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips and not on the waist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends the use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju- ry, first check with your doctor for specific recommendation.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

When using the seat belts, observe the following:

Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use a single belt for two or more peopleeven children.

Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the great- er the risk of death or personal in- jury.

Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or pinched in the seat or side doors.

Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be re- placed. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean- ers, or allow them to come into contact with the beltsthey may severely weaken the belts. (See Cleaning the interior on page 401 in Section 5.)

Replace the belt assembly (includ- ing bolts) if it has been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

66

Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the re- tractor and insert the tab into the buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move around freely.

When a passengers shoulder belt is com- pletely extended and is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This fea- ture is used to hold the child restraint system securely. (For details, see Child restraint on page 96 in this Section.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from death or serious injury.

Take up slack

Too high

Keep as low on hips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hipsnot on your waist, then ad- just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion upward through the latch plate.

Fastening front and rear seat belts

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

67

CAUTION

Both highpositioned lap belts and loosefitting belts could cause seri- ous injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hips as possible.

Do not place the shoulder belt un- der your arm.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder anchor

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up. To lower: Push in the lock release button and slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor is locked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause serious injuries in a collision.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

68

To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it re- tracts.

Rear center seatvehicles without third seats

Second seatsvehicles with third seats

Third seats

The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckle must be stowed before you fold the seatback. (See Folding down rear seats on page 50, Tumbling second seats on page 53, Folding up third seats on page 55 or Removing third seats on page 58 in this Section.)

Stowing rear seat belt buckles

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

69

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se- curely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is avail- able from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer to order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex- pect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering in- formation is available at your Toyota deal- er.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender, observe the following precautions. Failure to follow these instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of an accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.

Remember that the extender pro- vided for you may not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for another person, or at a different seating position than the one origi- nally intended.

If the seat belt extender has been connected to the drivers seat belt buckle without wearing the seat belt when using the extender in the drivers seat, the SRS drivers air- bag system will judge that the driv- er wears the seat belt even if not wearing it. In this case, the drivers airbag may not activate correctly, causing death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

Make sure the front passenger oc- cupant classification indicator light indicates ON when using the seat belt extender for the front passen- ger seat. If the indicator light indi- cates OFF, disconnect the extend- er tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Recon- nect the seat belt extender after making sure the indicator light indi- cates ON. If you use the seat belt extender while the indicator light indicates OFF, the front passen- ger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger side may not acti- vate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.

Be sure to wear the seat belt with- out the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

Seat belt extender

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

70

Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passen- ger seat. If installing a child re- straint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into the seat belt buckle so that the PRESS signs on the buckle release buttons of the ex- tender and the seat belt are both facing outward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extend- er itself.

As far as the seat belt extender on the front passenger side is concerned, do not fail to disconnect the extender from the seat belt after the above operation in or- der to activate the front passenger airbag correctly when getting into the vehicle next time.

When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt and the seat belt extend- er are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from death or serious injury.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

71

The driver and front passenger seat belt pretensioners are designed to be activated in response to a severe fron- tal impact. On vehicles equipped with curtain shield airbags, the pretensioners are also activated during vehicle rol- lover.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal impact or a vehicle rollover, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back by the re- tractors so that the belts snugly restrain the occupants.

The seat belt pretensioner will not activate if no passenger is detected in the front passenger seat by the front passenger oc- cupant classification system. However, the front passengers seat belt pretensioner may activate if luggage is put on the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant classification system, see Front passen- ger occupant classification system on page 91 in this Section.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air- bags may not operate together in all colli- sions. The seat belt pretensioners will not oper-

ate in a vehicle rollover if the RSCA OFF indicator light is on. For details, see Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch on page 95 in this Section.

Seat belt pretensioners

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

72

The seat belt pretensioner system con- sists mainly of the following components and their locations are shown in the il- lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front passenger occupant classification indicator light

4. Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

6. Front passengers seat belt buckle switch

7. Airbag sensor assembly

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sen- sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti- vated, an operating noise may be heard and a small amount of nontoxic gas may be released. This does not indicate that a fire is occurring. This gas is normally harmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat belt retractors remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pretensioner as- semblies, airbag sensor or sur- rounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may pre- vent the seat belt pretensioners from activating correctly, cause sud- den operation of the system or dis- able the system, which could result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.

Do not modify or change the sus- pension system. Such changes may cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, which could re- sult in death or serious injury. Con- sult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.

Do not use tires or wheels other than the manufactures recom- mended size. Such a use may cause the curtain shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners to inflate acci- dentally, which could result in death or serious injury. For details, see Checking and replacing tires on page 427 in Section 72.

Do not place luggage heavier than specified on the roof luggage carri- er. Such luggage may cause the curtain shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners to inflate accidentally, which could result in death or seri- ous injury. For details, see Roof luggage carrier on page 324 in Section 110.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

73

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the seat belt pretensioners in some cases.

Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile twoway radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player

Repairs on or near the front seat belt retractor assemblies

Modification of the front end struc- ture

Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end

Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure or con- sole

This indicator comes on when the igni- tion key is turned to the ON position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- ers seat position sensor, drivers seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system and indicator light, front passengers seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat- ors, RSCA OFF indicator light, intercon- necting wiring and power sources. (For details, see Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers on page 147 in Sec- tion 16.)

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion or remains on for more than 6 seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.

If any seat belt does not retract or can not be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat belt pretensioner.

The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area has been damaged.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

74

The SRS warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification in- dicator light will indicate OFF if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occu- pant classification system.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible:

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the seat belt pretensioners to operate.

Either seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem) front airbags are designed to pro- vide further protection for the driver and front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seats position sensor etc. The front passengers airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.

SRS airbags SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

75

In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front airbags work with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the drivers or front passengers head or chest caused by hitting the ve- hicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if lug- gage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant classification system, see Front passenger occupant classification system on page 91 in this Section.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

The SRS front airbag system is de- signed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems. The driver and front passenger can be killed or seriously injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat belts properly. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front passenger can move for- ward into direct contact with or close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the colli- sion. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wear- ing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For in- structions and precautions concern- ing the seat belt system, see Seat belts on page 64 in this Section.

Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploy- ing airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all in- fants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and proper- ly restrained. The rear seat is the safest for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installa- tion of a child restraint system, see Child restraint on page 96 in this Section.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

76

The SRS front airbags are designed to deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli- sions where the magnitude and duration of the forward deceleration of the ve- hicle exceeds the designed threshold level.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is above the de- signed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when the vehicle has the impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle underrides, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the ve- hicle is very close to the designed thresh- old level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is in- volved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, de- ployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the under- side of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

77

The SRS front airbag system consists mainly of the following components, and their locations are shown in the illustra- tion.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front passenger occupant classification indicator light

4. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)

5. Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

6. Front passengers seat belt buckle switch

7. Drivers seat belt buckle switch

8. Drivers seat position sensor

9. Airbag sensor assembly

10. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni- tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward decelera- tion beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in the infla- tors very quickly fills the airbags with nontoxic gas to help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The front airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the drivers vision should it be necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with nontoxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you should do so imme- diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious inju- ries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can cause more seri- ous injuries, especially if an occupants hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. This is why it is important for the occupant to: avoid placing any object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the airbag module, while still maintaining control of the ve- hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The airbags inflate only once. The windshield may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the inflat- ing airbag.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

78

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured. Toyota strongly recommends that:

The driver sit as far back as pos- sible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the ve- hicle.

The front passenger sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.

All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using the available seat belts.

For instructions and precautions con- cerning the seating position, see Front seat precautions on page 42 in this Section.

Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, an airbag when it inflates, can be killed or seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the seat, and always use your seat belt properly.

Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and be properly restrained.

Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use a child restraint system in the rear seat. For instruc- tions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see Child restraint on page 96 in this Sec- tion.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

79

Do not put anything or any part of your body on or in front of the dashboard or steering wheel pad that houses the front airbag sys- tem. They might restrict inflation or cause death or serious injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploying airbags. Like- wise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.

Do not modify or remove any wir- ing. Do not modify, remove, strike or open any components such as the steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover, dashboard near the front passenger airbag, front passenger airbag or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may pre- vent the front airbag system from activating correctly, cause sudden activation of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for a person with physical disability, con- sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan- gerously interfere with the SRS front airbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Toyota dealer. Such changes can in- terfere with proper operation of the SRS front airbag system in some cases.

Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile twoway radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player

Modification of the suspension sys- tem

Modification of the front end struc- ture

Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end

Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure, con- sole, steering column, steering wheel or dashboard near the front passenger airbag

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

80

This indicator comes on when the igni- tion key is turned to the ON position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS front airbags are oper- ating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- ers seat position sensor, drivers seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system and indicator light, front passengers seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat- ors, RSCA OFF indicator light, intercon- necting wiring and power sources. (For details, see Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers on page 147 in Sec- tion 16.)

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion or remains on for more than 6 seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.

The SRS warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification in- dicator light will indicate OFF if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occu- pant classification system.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible:

The SRS front airbags have been in- flated.

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard (shaded in the illustra- tion) is scratched, cracked, or other- wise damaged.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

81

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem) side airbags and curtain shield air- bags are designed to provide further protection for the driver, front passen- ger and rear seat passengers1/second seat passengers2 in addition to the pri- mary safety protection provided by the seat belts. 1: Without third seats 2: With third seats

In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbags in the impacted side work with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the drivers or front passengers chest. The SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the drivers, front passengers or rear/second passen- gers head and help prevent them from being thrown out of the vehicle.

The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no pas- senger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passen- ger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up regardless of the presence of the occu- pant in the seat. (As for the front passen- ger occupant classification system, see Front passenger occupant classification system on page 91 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas- senger side are activated even with no passenger in the front seat or rear/second outside seat.

SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

82

Roll sensing function: In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur- tain shield airbags on both sides work with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The curtain shield airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the drivers, front passengers or rear/second passen- gers head and help prevent them from being thrown out of the vehicle. (This function can be turned off if inflation is not desired. See Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch on page 95 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti- vate even when the side airbags are not activated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver, front passenger and rear/second passenger seat belt systems. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passen- gers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see Seat belts on page 64 in this Section.

Do not allow anyone to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag deploy even if he/she is a child seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side air- bag and curtain shield airbag in- flate, and the impact of the deploy- ing airbag could cause death or se- rious injury to the occupant.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

83

Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploy- ing airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all in- fants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and prop- erly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint sys- tem, see Child restraint on page 96 in this Section.

The SRS side airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

Collision from the front

The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is in- volved in a front or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low speed side collision.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

84

The curtain shield airbags may not acti- vate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as shown in the illustra- tion.

The curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the side or vehicle rollover.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

The angle of vehicle tipup is marginal

Skidding vehicle hitting a curb stone

The curtain shield airbags may inflate if the angle of vehicle tipup is margin- al or if the skidding vehicles tires hit a curb stone laterally as shown in the illustration.

Collision from the front Collision from

the rear

Pitch end over end

The curtain shield airbags are not gen- erally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a lowspeed side collision.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

85

Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system consists mainly of the fol- lowing components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS warning light

2. Front passenger occupant classification indicator light

3. Curtain shield airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

4. Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

5. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

8. Front passengers seat belt buckle switch

9. Airbag sensor assembly

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor as- sembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the side airbag inflators and/or the curtain shield airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with nontoxic gas to help restrain the lateral motion of the occu- pants.

In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with nontoxic gas to help restrain the lateral motion of the occupants.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

86

When the airbags inflate, they produce a fairly loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with nontoxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you should do so imme- diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious inju- ries, it may also cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the front and rear pillars, front, center and rear garnish and roof interior may be hot for several minutes, but the airbags them- selves will not be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate with considerable force. To reduce the possibility of death or serious injury when they in- flate, the driver, front passenger and rear/second passengers must:

Wear their seat belts properly.

Remain properly seated with their backs upright and against the seats at all times.

Improper sitting and wearing of the seat belts may not retain you inside the vehicle.

Do not allow anyone to lean against the door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with con- siderable speed and force. Other- wise, he/she may be killed or seri- ously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.

Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply excessive weight to the outer side of the seats with a side airbag, and to the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail with a curtain shield airbag.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

87

Make sure the RSCA OFF indica- tor light is off. The curtain shield airbags will not inflate in a vehicle rollover if this indicator light is on and you may be killed or seriously injured. For details, see Roll sens- ing of curtain shield airbags off switch on page 95 in this Section.

Do not allow anyone to get his/her head closer to the area where the side airbag and curtain shield air- bag inflate, since these airbags could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken espe- cially when you have a small child in the vehicle.

Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat, facing the pas- sengers side door, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken espe- cially when you have a small child in the vehicle.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

88

Do not allow anyone to get his/her head or hands out of windows since the curtain shield airbags could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken espe- cially when you have a small child in the vehicle.

Do not attach a cup holder or any other device or object on or around the door. When the side airbag in- flates, the cup holder or any other device or object will be thrown with great force or the side airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.

Do not attach a microphone or any other device or object near the area where the curtain shield airbags ac- tivate such as on the windshield glass, side door glass, front, center and roof side garnish, roof interior or assist grips. When the curtain shield airbags inflate, the micro- phone or other device or object will be thrown away with great force or the curtain shield airbags may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

89

Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed objects on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates, those items will be thrown away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate cor- rectly, resulting in death or serious injury. When you hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook direct- ly.

Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the side air- bags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from acti- vating correctly, causing death or serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of the seats with side airbags. Such changes may prevent the side airbag system from activat- ing correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate ac- cidentally, resulting in death or seri- ous injury.

Do not disassemble or repair the front pillars and roof side rail con- taining the curtain shield airbags. Such changes may disable the sys- tem or cause the curtain shield air- bags to inflate accidentally, result- ing in death or serious injury.

Do not modify or change the sus- pension system. Such changes may cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, which could re- sult in death or serious injury.

Do not use tires or wheels other than the manufacturers recom- mended size. Such a use may cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, which could result in death or serious injury. For details, see Checking and replacing tires on page 427 in Section 72.

Do not place luggage heavier than specified on the roof luggage carri- er. Such luggage may cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate ac- cidentally, which could result in death or serious injury. For details, see Roof luggage carrier on page 324 in Section 110.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for a person with physical disability, con- sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan- gerously interfere with the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags op- eration.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system in some cases.

Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile twoway radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player

Modification of the side structure of the passenger compartment

Repairs made on or near the con- sole or front seat

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

90

This indicator comes on when the igni- tion key is turned to the ON position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- ers seat position sensor, drivers seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system and indicator light, front passengers seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat- ors, RSCA OFF indicator light, intercon- necting wiring and power sources. (For details, see Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers on page 147 in Sec- tion 16.)

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion or remains on for more than 6 seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.

The SRS warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification in- dicator light will indicate OFF if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occu- pant classification system.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

91

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible:

Any of the SRS side airbags and cur- tain shield airbags have been inflated.

The portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

The surface of the seats with the side airbag (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam- aged.

The portion of the front, center and rear garnish, and roof interior contain- ing the curtain shield airbags inside (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sys- tem. This system detects the conditions 14 in the table on page 93 and based on these conditions activates or deacti- vates the following systems;

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Front passengers seat belt pretension- er

The system monitors the weight and load on the front passenger seat, and the seat belt buckle switch to determine conditions 14.

In order for the system to detect the conditions correctly, do not do any of the following:

Apply a heavy load to the front pas- senger seat.

Attach a commercial seatback table, etc. to the front passenger seatback.

Put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the seatback from the rear passenger seat.

The front passenger occupant classifi- cation indicator light indicates the ac- tuation of the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger seat and front passengers seat belt preten- sioner.

The indicator light will indicate OFF when the ignition switch is in the ON position with the condition 2 in the table shown below.

Front passenger occupant classification system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

92

If the front passenger occupant classifica- tion system determines that a person of adult size sits in the front passenger seat but the OFF indicator is illuminated, one of the following is likely to have occurred:

A rear passenger lifts the front passen- ger seat cushion with their legs.

Objects are placed under the front pas- senger seat.

The front passenger seatback is in contact with the rear/second seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects an adult sitting in the front passenger seat, make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the ON indicator is illu- minated when an adult is seated in the front passenger seat. If the OFF indica- tor is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

The front passenger occupant classifi- cation indicator light will indicate ON and OFF when the ignition key is turned to the ON position. After about four seconds, it will go off. After that, the front passenger occupant clas- sification system operates and judges whether to indicate ON or OFF.

The SRS warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classifi- cation indicator light will indicate OFF if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

93

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detected by the front passenger

occupant classification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Front passenger occupant

classification indicator light

SRS warning light

Front passengers

seat belt reminder light

Front passenger

airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger

seat

Curtain shield airbag in the

front passenger

side

Front passengers

seat belt pretensioner

1. Adult1 ON Off Flashing4 Activated

2. Child2 or child restraint system3 OFF Off Flashing4 Deactivated

Activated

Activated

3. Unoccupied Not illuminated

Off Off Deactivated Deactivated

4. There is a malfunction in the system

OFF On Off Deactivated Activated

1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

3: Never install a rearfacing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forwardfacing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See Child restraint on page 96 in this Section as for installing the child restraint system.)

4: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

94

CAUTION

To avoid potential death or serious injury when the front passenger occu- pant classification system does not detect the conditions correctly, ob- serve the following.

Make sure the front passenger oc- cupant classification indicator light indicates ON when using the seat belt extender for the front passen- ger seat. If the indicator light indi- cates OFF, disconnect the extend- er tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Recon- nect the seat belt extender after making sure the indicator light indi- cates ON. If you use the seat belt extender while the indicator light indicates OFF, the front passen- ger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger side may not acti- vate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.

Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a second seat. This may cause the OFF indicator to be illuminated, which indicates that the passen- gers airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear/second seat, return the seatback to a posi- tion where it does not touches the rear/second seat.

Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the ve- hicle is moving. Reclining the seat- back excessively may lessen the ef- fectiveness of the seat belt system.

If an adult sits in the front passen- ger seat, the occupant classification indicator light should indicate ON. If the OFF indicator is illumina- ted, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the OFF indica- tor still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear/second seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

Wear the seat belt properly.

Make sure the front passengers seat belt tab has not been left in- serted into the buckle before some- one sits in the front passenger seat.

Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat.

Do not put weight on the front pas- senger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear/second pas- senger seat.

Do not let a rear/second passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

Child restraint systems installed on the rear/second seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

95

When it is unavoidable to install the forwardfacing child restraint sys- tem on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (As for the installation order, see Installation with seat belt on page 99 in this Section.)

Do not remove the front seats.

Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunc- tion of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer im- mediately.

The front passenger occupant classifica- tion indicator light may indicate ON (the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger seat may deploy) even if observing the above cautions, when a child sits in, or a forwardfacing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. Refer to all the cau- tions in SRS airbags on page 74 and Child restraint on page 96 in this Sec- tion.

The roll sensing of curtain shield air- bags off switch (RSCA OFF switch) can turn off the curtain shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners in a vehicle rollover. This switch should only be used if inflation is not desired (such as extreme offroad driving).

When you push the RSCA OFF switch for a few seconds with the ignition switch on, the RSCA OFF indicator light comes on and the roll sensing function is turned off. When you push the switch again, the indicator light goes off and the roll sens- ing function is turned on. (For details about the roll sensing function, see SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags on page 81 in this Section.)

In a severe side impact, the curtain shield airbags on impacted side will inflate even if the roll sensing function is turned off. (For details about the curtain shield air- bags, see SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags on page 81 in this Sec- tion.)

In a severe frontal impact, the seat belt pretensioners will work even if the roll sensing function is turned off. (For details about the seat belt pretensioners, see Seat belt pretensioners on page 71 in this Section.)

If the ignition switch is turned to ACC or LOCK with the roll sensing function off and then the ignition switch is turned back to ON, the roll sensing function will turn back on automatically.

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

96

CAUTION

Before normal driving, make sure the RSCA OFF indicator light is off.

When the roll sensing function is turned off (and the RSCA OFF indicator light is on), the curtain shield airbags and seat belt preten- sioners will not work in a vehicle rollover. Turning off the curtain shield airbags and seat belt preten- sioners reduces occupant protection which your vehicle safety systems can provide in accidents and in- crease the likelihood of death or serious injuries.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap- propriate child restraint systems for children.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of a child restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicles seat belt. See Seat belts on page 64 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

For effective protection in automo- bile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an acci- dent, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicles interior.

Toyota strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child, and is put on the rear seat. Accord- ing to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

Never install a rearfacing child re- straint system on the front passen- ger seat even if the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates OFF. In the event of an accident, the impact of the rapid inflation of the front passen- ger airbag could cause death or se- rious injury to the child if the rear facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

Child restraint Child restraint precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

97

A forwardfacing child restraint sys- tem should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if the front pas- senger occupant classification indi- cator light indicates OFF, because the front passenger airbag could in- flate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and/or curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passen- ger seat. If installing a child re- straint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly se- cured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sud- den stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap por- tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully consult the manufacturers instructions which accompany the child restraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system following the manufactur- ers instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint system.

Install the child restraint system correctly following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions are also provided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with the seat belt or place it somewhere other than the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from in- juring passengers in the event of a sud- den stop or accident.

Child restraint system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

98

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types depending on the childs age and size.

(A) Infant seat (B) Convertible seat (C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufac- turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se- curing the top strap of a child restraint system.

For instructions about how to use the an- chor bracket, see Using a top strap on page 109 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap- proved for your vehicle may also be used. See Installation with child restraint low- er anchorages on page 114 in this Sec- tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat

Types of child restraint system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

99

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear facing position only.

CAUTION

Never install a rearfacing child re- straint system on the front passen- ger seat even if the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates OFF. In the event of an accident, the impact of the rapid inflation of the front passen- ger airbag could cause death or se- rious injury to the child if the rear facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

Do not install a child restraint sys- tem on the second (or third) seat if it interferes with the lock mecha- nism of the front (or second) seats. Otherwise, the child or front (or second) seat occupant(s) may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

If the drivers seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child re- straint system on the rear right seat.

Installation with seat belt

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

100

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufactur- er and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immedi- ately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

101

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the infant seat secure- ly.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys- tem in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufac- turer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passen- ger.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

102

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for- wardfacing or rearfacing position de- pending on the age and size of the child. When installing, follow the manufacturers instructions about the applicable age and size of the child as well as directions for installing the child restraint system.

Install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat only when it is un- avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. In order to activate the occupant classification system correctly, install the forwardfacing child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the following order:

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi- tion.

2. Move the front passenger seat to the rearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on the front passenger seat without putting your weight on the front passenger seat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat belt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended. To hold the seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convert- ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys- tem in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufac- turer.

7. Put a child on the child restraint sys- tem and secure the child, complying with the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

103

The occupant classification indicator light should indicate OFF when the ignition key is ON and the child is in the child restraint system after following these pro- cedures. The OFF indicator indicates the SRS front passenger airbag and side air- bag on the passenger side will not deploy. If the indicator light indicates ON, re- move the child restraint system and rein- stall it with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position. If the indicator light still indicates ON when the ignition key is turned to the ON position, then the SRS front passenger airbag and side air- bag on the passenger side may deploy in an accident. Do not drive the vehicle in this condition. Remove the child restraint system and contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never install a rearfacing child re- straint system on the front passen- ger seat. A forwardfacing child re- straint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when unavoidable. If you must install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat, put the seat in its most rearward position, and install the forwardfacing child restraint system in the proper or- der. Otherwise, the front passenger occupant classification system can not detect the presence of the child restraint system and the front pas- senger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger seat could deploy.

CAUTION

Never install a rearfacing child re- straint system on the front passen- ger seat even if the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates OFF. In the event of an accident, the impact of the rapid inflation of the front passen- ger airbag could cause death or se- rious injury to the child if the rear facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

104

Move seat fully back

A forwardfacing child restraint sys- tem should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if the front pas- senger occupant classification indi- cator light indicates OFF, because the front passenger airbag could in- flate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and/or curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

Do not install a child restraint sys- tem on the second (or third) seat if it interferes with the lock mecha- nism of the front (or second) seats. Otherwise, the child or front (or second) seat occupant(s) may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

If the drivers seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child re- straint system on the rear right seat.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

105

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the convertible seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immedi- ately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

106

3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convert- ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys- tem in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufac- turer.

4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passen- ger.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

107

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in for- wardfacing position only.

Move seat fully back

CAUTION

A forwardfacing child restraint sys- tem should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if the front pas- senger occupant classification indi- cator light indicates OFF, because the front passenger airbag could in- flate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and/or curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

108

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and across the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the childs shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the childs hips. See Seat belts on page 64 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder. The belt should be kept away from childs neck, but not falling off childs shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured in case of sud- den braking or a collision.

Both highpositioned lap belts and loosefitting belts could cause death or serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on a childs hips as possible.

For childs safety, do not place the shoulder belt under childs arm.

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immedi- ately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

109

2. To remove the booster seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets behind the rear seatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of the anchor brackets.

Using a top strap (vehicles without third seats)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

110

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

2. Raise the anchor bracket. 3. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

The anchor bracket is only designed to secure the top strap. Do not use the anchor bracket for any other purpose.

For instructions to install the child re- straint system, see Child restraint on page 96 in this Section.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

111

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child re- straint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

4. Replace the head restraint. Lower the anchor bracket when it is not in use.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

112

Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets behind the sec- ond seatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each second seat.

This symbol indicates the locations of the anchor brackets.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

Using a top strap (vehicles with third seats)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

113

2. Open the anchor bracket cover. 3. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

The anchor bracket is only designed to secure the top strap. Do not use the anchor bracket for any other purpose.

For instructions to install the child re- straint system, see Child restraint on page 96 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child re- straint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

114

4. Replace the head restraint.

Close the anchor bracket cover when the anchor bracket is not used.

Lower anchorages for the child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specifications are installed in the rear seats.

The anchorages are installed in the gap between the seat cushion and seatback of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification can be fixed to these anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle. Canada only

Type A

Installation with child restraint lower anchorages (vehicles without third seats)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

115

Canada only

Type B

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION

1. Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly and confirm the position of the lower an- chorages near the button on the seatback.

2. Type ALatch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps.

Type BLatch the buckles onto the anchorages.

For owners in CanadaThe symbol on a child restraint system indicates the pres- ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see Using a top strap on page 109 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc- tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular ob- jects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught.

Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Do not install a child restraint sys- tem on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occupant(s) may be killed or seriously injured in case of sud- den braking or a collision.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

116

Lower anchorages for the child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specifications are installed in the second seats.

The anchorages are installed in the seat cushion of the right side seating position and between the center and left side seat- ing position.

Child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification can be fixed to these anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle.

1st lock position

5th lock position

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback. Make sure the rear seat legs are relocked into place (folding down the seatback will disengage them) by pushing down- ward on the back of the seat. Adjust the seatback to the 1st lock position (most upright position) and then to the 5th lock position.

Make sure the seat and seatback is locked securely.

2. Take off the cover on the seat cush- ion.

Installation with child restraint lower anchorages (vehicles with third seats)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

117

Canada only

Type A

Canada only

Type B

3. Widen the slits of the seat cushion slightly and confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the but- ton on the seatback.

4. Type ALatch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps.

Type BLatch the buckles onto the anchorages.

For owners in CanadaThe symbol on a child restraint system indicates the pres- ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see Using a top strap on page 112 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc- tion manual equipped with each product.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

118

CAUTION

When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular ob- jects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught.

Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

After securing the child restraint system, never recline the seat.

Do not install a child restraint sys- tem on the second seat if it inter- feres with the lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occupant(s) may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

When using the left side lower an- chorages for the child restraint sys- tem, do not sit in the center seat. The performance of the center seat belt cannot be brought out suffi- ciently because the belt may be highpositioned or the seat belt may be loosefitting, posing the risk of serious injury in the case of collision.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

119

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Steering wheel and Mirrors Tilt steering wheel 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antiglare inside rear view mirror 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto antiglare inside rear view mirror 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear sideview mirrors 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 4

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

120

To change the steering wheel angle, hold the steering wheel, pull the lock release lever toward you, tilt the steer- ing wheel to the desired angle and re- lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi- tion, it will spring up as you release the lock release lever.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishan- dle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel, try moving it up and down to make sure it is locked in position.

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEEL TILT

To change the steering wheel angle, hold the steering wheel, pull the lock release lever toward you, tilt the steer- ing wheel to the desired angle and re- lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi- tion, it will spring up as you release the lock release lever.

Tilt steering wheel Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

121

ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN

To change the steering wheel length, push down the lock release lever, set the steering wheel to the desired length and return the lever to its original posi- tion.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishan- dle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel, try moving it up and down or for- ward and rearward to make sure it is locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your vehicle in the mir- ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis- tance of any object seen in the outside rear view mirror on the passengers side because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than when seen in a flat mirror.

On some models, when you push the back window defogger switch, the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the surface. (See Back win- dow and outside rear view mirror defog- gers on page 142 in Section 15.)

Outside rear view mirrors

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

122

On some models, the outside rear view mirrors are rain clearing mirrors that clear the drivers rear view when it rains. (For details, see Rain clearing mirrors on page 403 in Section 5.)

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious inju- ries.

On some models, since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the defogger switch is on.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switchTo select the mirror to be adjusted Push the switch to L (left) or R (right).

2. Control switchTo move the mirror Push the switch in the desired direc- tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is in the ACC or ON position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control or scrape the mir- ror face. Use a spray deicer to free the mirror.

Power rear view mirror control

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

123

The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back- ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the driver and pas- senger side rear view mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your vehicle in the mir- ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you during night driving, operate the lever on the lower edge of the mirror.

Daylight drivingLever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greater clarity at this position.

Night drivingLever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you also lose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the ve- hicle and an accident may occur re- sulting in death or serious injuries.

Folding rear view mirrors Antiglare inside rear view mirror

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

124

Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your vehicle in the mir- ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti glare function. The function is designed to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you during night driving.

When the ignition key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear view mirror al- ways turns on in the automatic function mode.

The indicator illuminates to show you that the function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirror detects light from the headlights of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface darkens slightly to reduce the reflected light.

To turn off the automatic function, push the MIRROR switch.

To turn on the automatic function again, push the MIRROR switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rear view is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, it may take a little longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of headlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the ve- hicle and an accident may occur re- sulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of anti glare mirror sensors located on both sides of the mirror, do not touch or cover the sensors with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc.

Auto antiglare inside rear view mirror

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

125

Rear sideview mirrors are useful as a secondary means of checking the area to the rear of the vehicle.

Carefully check the area to the rear of the vehicle by either looking directly or using both outside and inside rear view mirrors.

Type A

Type B

Rear sideview mirrors Sun visors

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

126

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the frontSwing down the main sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the sideSwing down the main sun visor, remove it from the hook and swing it to the lateral side (position 2).

Type AIf glare comes from obliquely be- hind you, extend the plate at the end of the visor (to position 3).

Type BIf glare comes from obliquely be- hind you, slide the main sun visor back- ward (to position 3).

To block the glare from the front when the main sun visor is swung to the lateral side, swing down the sub visor.

CAUTION

Type ADo not extend the plate at the end of the sun visor when the visor is in the position 1. It can cover the antiglare inside rear view mirror and obstruct the rear view.

Type BSlide the main sun visor only when it is swung down to the lateral side. It can cover the anti glare inside rear view mirror and obstruct the rear view.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

127

Type A

Type B

To use the vanity mirrors, swing down the main sun visor and slide the cover.

Type A

The vanity light comes on when you slide the cover.

To prevent the battery being discharged, the light will automatically turn off when the key is removed for 30 minutes or more.

Vanity mirrors

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

128

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

129

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Lights, Wipers and Defogger Headlights and turn signals 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior light 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment light 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch light 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running board lights 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window wiper and washer 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 142. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 5

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

130

For the U.S.A.

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights

For CanadaThe tail light indicator (green light) on the instrument panel will tell you that the tail lights are on.

Position 2Headlights and all of the above

For the U.S.A.The headlight low beam indicator light (green light) on the instru- ment panel will tell you that the low beams are on.

Position 3 (AUTO)Headlights and/or all of the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend- ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2 to turn on the headlights if they are need- ed immediately when entering a dark tun- nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is on the top of the drivers side instrument panel.

Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.

The operating condition or sensitivity can be changed. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or position 3 with the tail lights on

The lights automatically turn off when the drivers door is opened with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.

Headlights and turn signals (with automatic light control system)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

131

Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on

The lights automatically turn off after 30 seconds when all the side doors and back door are closed with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.

If the LOCK switch of the wireless re- mote control transmitter is pushed twice simultaneously, the lights automatically turn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn off can be changed. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the drivers door is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 30 minutes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the ON position or actuate the headlight switch.

If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis- charged, do not leave the lights on for a long period when the engine is not running.

Daytime running light (DRL) system (all models sold in Canada and some mod- els sold in U.S.A.)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. The DRL system can be helpful in many differ- ent driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turn signal lights come on when:

The ignition is on with the engine run- ning.

The knob is in the OFF position, position 1 or position 3 with the tail lights on.

The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob to position 2 or position 3 with the head- lights on, or turn the ignition switch off.

This DRL system can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

HighLow beamsFor high beams, turn the headlights on and push the lever away from you (position 1). Pull the lever to- ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light (blue light) on the instrument panel will tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights (position 3)Pull the lever all the way back. The high beam headlights turn off when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights with the knob turned to OFF.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

132

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/ turn signal lever up or down to position 1.

The key must be in the ON position.

The lever automatically returns after you make a turn, but you may have to return it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the pressure point (position 2) and hold it.

On some models, the front turn signal lights are on during daytime running light system is on. For details, see Daytime running light system.

If the turn signal indicator lights (green lights) on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, a front or rear turn signal bulb is burned out.

For the U.S.A.

For Canada

Headlights and turn signals (without automatic light control system)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

133

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights

For CanadaThe tail light indicator (green light) on the instrument panel will tell you that the tail lights are on.

Position 2Headlights and all of the above

For the U.S.A.The headlight low beam indicator light (green light) on the instru- ment panel will tell you that the low beams are on.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1

The lights automatically turn off when the drivers door is opened with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.

Position 2

The lights automatically turn off after 30 seconds when all the side doors and back door are closed with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.

If the LOCK switch of the wireless re- mote control transmitter is pushed twice simultaneously, the lights automatically turn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn off can be changed. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the drivers door is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 30 minutes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the ON position or actuate the headlight switch.

If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis- charged, do not leave the lights on for a long period when the engine is not running.

Daytime running light (DRL) system (all models sold in Canada and some mod- els sold in U.S.A.)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. The DRL system can be helpful in many differ- ent driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turn signal lights come on when:

The ignition is on with the engine run- ning.

The knob is in the OFF position or position 1.

The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob to position 2 or turn the ignition switch off.

This DRL system can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

134

HighLow beamsFor high beams, turn the headlights on and push the lever away from you (position 1). Pull the lever to- ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light (blue light) on the instrument panel will tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights (position 3)Pull the lever all the way back. The high beam headlights turn off when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights with the knob turned to OFF.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/ turn signal lever up or down to position 1.

The key must be in the ON position.

The lever automatically returns after you make a turn, but you may have to return it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the pressure point (position 2) and hold it.

On some models, the front turn signal lights are on during daytime running light system is on. For details, see Daytime running light system.

If the turn signal indicator lights (green lights) on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, a front or rear turn signal bulb is burned out.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

135

To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if your vehicle must be stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos- sible.

The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency flashers are operat- ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis- charged, do not leave the switch on longer than necessary when the en- gine is not running.

To adjust the brightness of the instru- ment panel lights, turn the dial.

Emergency flashers Instrument panel light control

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

136

To turn on the front fog lights, twist the band of the headlight and turn sig- nal switch lever. They will come on only when the headlights are on low beam.

Front fog light indicator light on the instru- ment panel will tell you that the front fog lights are on.

To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.

The interior light switch has the following positions:

ONKeeps the light on all the time.

OFFTurns the light off.

DOORTurns the light on when any of the side doors and back door is opened. The light goes off when all the side doors and back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operationWhen the switch is in the DOOR position and any of the side doors and back door is opened, the light will come on. After all the side doors and back door are closed, the light re- mains on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

Ignition switch linked operationWhen the switch is in the DOOR position, and the ignition switch is turned to LOCK, the light will come on. The light remains on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are closed when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

All the side doors and back door are closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter, the light will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

Front fog lights Interior light (without rear seat entertainment system)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

137

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless remote control transmitter linked opera- tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged, the lights will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened with the switch at the DOOR position for 30 minutes or more.

The interior lights operate separately with each outer lens.

To turn on the light, push the switch. To turn the light off, push the switch once again.

The interior light switch has the following positions:

OFFThe lights are off unless you oper- ate either outside switch.

DOORTurns the light on when any of the side doors and back door is opened. The light goes off when all the side doors and back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operationWhen the switch is in the DOOR position and any of the side doors and back door is opened, the light will come on. After all the side doors and back door are closed, the light re- mains on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

Ignition switch linked operationWhen the switch is in the DOOR position, and the ignition switch is turned to LOCK, the light will come on. The light remains on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are closed when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

All the side doors and back door are closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter, the light will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

Interior light (with rear seat entertainment system)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

138

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless remote control transmitter linked opera- tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged, the lights will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened with the switch at the DOOR position for 30 minutes or more.

To turn on the personal lights, push the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens once again.

To turn on the luggage compartment light, slide the switch.

The luggage compartment light switch has the following positions:

ONKeeps the light on all the time.

OFFTurns the light off.

DOORTurns the light on when any of the side doors and back door is opened. The light goes off when all the side doors and back door are closed.

Personal lights Luggage compartment light

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

139

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operationWhen the switch is in the DOOR position and any of the side doors and back door is opened, the light will come on. After all the side doors and back door are closed, the light re- mains on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

Ignition switch linked operationWhen the switch is in the DOOR position, and the ignition switch is turned to LOCK, the light will come on. The light remains on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are closed when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

All the side doors and back door are closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter, the light will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless remote control transmitter linked opera- tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged, the lights will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened with the switch at the DOOR position for 30 minutes or more.

For easy access to the ignition switch, the ignition switch light comes on when any of the side doors and back door is opened or when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.

The light remains on for about 15 seconds after all the side doors and back door are closed.

However, in the following cases, the light goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are closed when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

All the side doors and back door are closed and locked.

Ignition switch light

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

140

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter, the light will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless remote control transmitter linked opera- tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged, the light will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened for 30 minutes or more.

Lighting the running boards and the ground helps you easily to get in and out of the vehicle in the night. The lights come on when any of the side doors is opened.

The lights remain on for about 15 seconds after all the side doors are closed.

However, in the following cases, the light go off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are closed and locked.

The vehicle speed reaches 8 km/h (5 mph) or higher.

When any of the side doors and back door is unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter, the lights will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

To prevent the battery being discharged, the light will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened for 30 minutes or more.

Running board lights

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

141

To turn on the windshield wipers, move the lever to the desired setting.

The key must be in the ON position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

The INT band lets you adjust the wiping time interval when the wiper lever is in the intermittent position (position 1). Twist the band upward to increase the time be- tween sweeps, and downward to decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever toward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they will operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid, see Adding washer fluid on page 437 in Section 73.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield, which can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind- shield is dry. It may scratch the glass.

To turn on the back window wiper, twist the lever knob upward.

The key must be in the ON position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the back window, twist the knob upward or downward as far as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob automatically returns from these positions after you release it. The back window wip- er operates while the washer squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid, see Adding washer fluid on page 437 in Section 73.

Windshield wipers and washer Back window wiper and washer

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

142

If the back window is not fully closed, the back window wiper and washer will not work. Make sure the back window is fully closed when using the back window wiper and washer.

NOTICE

Do not operate the back window wip- er if the back window is dry. It may scratch the glass.

To defog or defrost the back window, push the switch with the back window closed.

The key must be in the ON position.

The thin heater wires on the inside of the back window will quickly clear the surface. An indicator light will illuminate to indicate the defogger is operating.

On some models, heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will also quickly clear the surfaces.

Push the switch once again to turn the defoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af- ter the defoggers have operated about 15 minutes.

If the back window is not fully closed, the back window defogger will not work. Make sure the back window is fully closed when using the back window defogger.

If the back window is opened while the defogger is working, the defogger will au- tomatically turn off. Even if the back win- dow is fully closed after that, the defogger will not automatically turn on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers off when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the defoggers on for a long time could cause the battery to discharge, especially during stopandgo driving. The defoggers are not designed for drying rain water or for melting snow.

CAUTION

On some models, since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the defogger switch is on.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the back window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connec- tors.

Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

143

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators Fuel gauge 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 6

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

144

Low fuel level warning light

The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the tank when the ignition switch is on.

Nearly fullNeedle at F Nearly emptyNeedle at E

It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler- ating or making turns. This is caused by the movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches E or the low fuel level warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move- ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is on. The engine operating temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone, your engine is too hot. If your vehicle overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the engine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions, such as:

Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.

Fuel gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

145

Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in stopandgo traffic.

Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The thermostat is designed to con- trol the flow of coolant to keep the temperature of the engine within the specified operating range.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. See If your ve- hicle overheats on page 378 in Section 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to select correct shift points and to prevent en- gine lugging and overrevving.

Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This may cause severe engine damage.

Tachometer

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

146

This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters.

1. OdometerShows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip metersShow two different distances independently driven since the last time each trip meter was set to zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculate the fuel economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip. All trip meter data is cancelled if the elec- trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knobResets the two trip meters to zero, and also change the meter display.

To change the meter display, quickly push and release the knob. The meter display changes in the order from the odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B, then back to the odometer each time you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis- play the meter A reading, then push and hold the knob until the meter is set to zero. The same process can be applied for resetting the trip meter B.

Odometer and two trip meters

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

147

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) (indicator and buzzer)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b) (indicator and buzzer)

Fasten drivers seat belt.

(c) Fasten front passengers seat belt.

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

148

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(h) Replace engine oil.

(i) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Close all side doors and back door.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(m) Stop and check.

(n) Adjust tire pressure. If the light remains, contact Toyota dealer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

149

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(o) Add washer fluid.

(p) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

150

(a) Brake System Warning Light and Buzzer

This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition key is in the ON posi- tion.

When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to the ON position even after the parking brake is released.

When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the brake fluid level is low.

When the hydraulic brake booster fails...

If the hydraulic booster causes a problem resulting in poor braking performance, the warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuously.

Have your vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer in the following cases:

The light does not come on even if the parking brake is applied when the igni- tion key is in the ON position.

The light does not come on even if the ignition key is turned on with the park- ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc- curs, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

The light does not turn off even after the parking brake is released while the engine is running.

The warning buzzer comes on to- gether with the warning light.

In either case, this can indicate that the brakes may not work properly and your stopping distance will be- come longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an immediate stop.

The brake system warning light re- mains on together with the ABS warning light.

In this case, not only the antilock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely un- stable during braking.

Any of the following conditions may oc- cur, but do not indicate the malfunc- tion:

The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

151

(b) Drivers Seat Belt Reminder Light and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to buckle up the drivers seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to ON or START, the reminder light flashes and buzzer come on if the drivers seat belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light continues flashing and the buzzer sounds for about 4 to 8 se- conds.

(c) Front Passengers Seat Belt Reminder Light

The light acts as a reminder to have the front passenger buckle up the seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to ON or START, the reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger seat and does not fasten the seat belt.

If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight, the reminder light may flash.

(d) Charging System Warning Light

This warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi- tion, and goes off when the engine is started.

When there are problems in the charging system while the engine is running, the warning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warning light comes on while the engine is running, malfunctions such as the en- gine drive belt being broken may have occurred. If the warning light comes on, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the engine oil pres- sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you are driving, pull off the road to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

The light may occasionally flicker when the engine is idling or it may come on briefly after a hard stop. There is no cause for concern if it then goes out when the engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the warning light oneven for one block. It may ruin the engine.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

152

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and goes off after the engine starts. This means that the warning light system is operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while driving, first check the followings.

Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi- ately.

Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not loose...

There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission control system, elec- tronic throttle control system, automatic transmission electrical system or warn- ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in the elec- tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev- er, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to the ACC or LOCK position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro- neous pedal operation.

Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Toyota dealer to check your vehicles emission control system and OBD (OnBoard Diagnostics) system before taking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs on page 410 in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up the tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move- ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

153

(h) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light acts as a reminder to replace the engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to ON and will go off after about a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500 miles) after the engine oil replacement, this light illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about 12 seconds with the ignition key turned to the ON position. If you continue driving without the engine oil replacement, and if the driv- ing range exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), the light will come on after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. The light will remain on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend that you replace the engine oil at an early opportunity depending on the driving and road condition. If the light comes on, re- place it as soon as possible.

You need to reset the light after the en- gine oil replacement. Reset the light by following the procedure below:

1. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or LOCK position with the odometer reading shown. (For details, see Odometer and two trip meters on page 146 in this Section.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi- tion while holding down the trip meter reset button.

Hold down the button until the light goes off. Before the light goes off, it illuminates for 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds and illuminates for 1 second.

If the system fails to reset, the light will remain flashing.

(i) ABS Warning Light

The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position. If the anti lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.

When the ABS warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the following systems do not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.

Antilock brake system

Brake assist system

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

AUTO LSD system (twowheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system

When the ABS warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the antilock brake system does not operate, so that the wheels will lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

154

If either of the following conditions oc- curs, this indicates a malfunction some- where in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are dri- ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the ABS warning light remains on together with the brake system warn- ing light, immediately stop your ve- hicle at a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the antilock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unsta- ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate a malfunc- tion:

The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.

(j) VSC TRAC Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

Vehicle stability control system

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

AUTO LSD system (twowheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system

The light will come on when the ignition key turned to ON, and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights. It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, the above mentioned systems do not work. However, as conventional braking operates when applied, there is no problem to con- tinue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

When the brake fluid level is too low, the above mentioned systems will not operate and the warning light comes on.

(k) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the side doors and back door are completely closed.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

155

(l) SRS Warning Light

This indicator comes on when the igni- tion key is turned to the ON position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- ers seat position sensor, drivers seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system and indicator light, front passengers seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat- ors, RSCA OFF indicator light, intercon- necting wiring and power sources.

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion or remains on for more than 6 seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.

The SRS warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification in- dicator light will indicate OFF if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occu- pant classification system.

(m) Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Warning Light (fourwheel drive models)

This light warns that the automatic trans- mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv- ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and put the selector lever in P. With the engine id- ling, wait until the light goes off. If the light goes off, you may start the vehicle again. If the light does not go off, call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warning light on may damage the automatic transmission.

(n) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire pressure of one or more of your tires (including the spare tire) is low. The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It goes off after a few sec- onds. This indicates that the tire pressure warning system is functioning properly.

If the warning light comes on, stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as pos- sible and check that the inflation pressure of all tires (including the spare tire) is as specified on the tire and loading informa- tion label. (See Checking tire inflation pressure on page 425 in Section 72.) The light should go off a few minutes after the tire pressure is adjusted.

If the warning light blinks, the tire pres- sure warning system may be malfunction- ing. Contact your Toyota dealer.

For details, see Tire pressure warning system on page 190 in Section 17.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

156

(o) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light (for vehicles sold in Canada)

The light warns that the windshield washer fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at your earliest opportunity. (For instructions, see Adding washer fluid on page 437 in Section 73.)

(p) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove the key when you open the drivers door with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (except the low fuel level warning light and low windshield washer fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors or back door. The open door warning light should come on.

3. Close the door. The open door warning light should go off.

4. Turn the ignition key to ON, but do not start the engine. All the service reminder indicators ex- cept the open door warning light should come on.

The following service reminder indica- tors go off after a few seconds:

Engine oil replacement reminder light

ABS warning light

VSC TRAC warning light

Low tire pressure warning light

RSCA OFF indicator light

AUTO LSD indicator light (twowheel drive models)

VSC OFF indicator light (fourwheel drive models)

Slip indicator light

Height control indicator lights

Downhill assist control system indicator light (fourwheel drive models)

Height control OFF indicator light

The SRS warning light goes off after about 6 seconds.

There may be the case that the ABS warning light (brake assist system warning light), VSC TRAC warning light and AUTO LSD (twowheel drive models), VSC OFF (fourwheel drive models) or slip indicator light stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It is normal if they go out after a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn- ing buzzer does not function as described above, have it checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

157

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake Ignition switch 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fourwheel drive system 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active traction control system 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO LSD system 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downhill assist control system 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hillstart assist control system 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear height control air suspension 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure warning system 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 7

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

158

STARTStarter motor on. The key will return to the ON position when released.

For starting tips, see page 355 in Section 3.

ONEngine on and all accessories on.

This is the normal driving position.

ACCAccessories such as the radio operate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the ACC or LOCK position and open the drivers door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.

LOCKEngine is off and the steering wheel is locked. The key can be re- moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn it from ACC to the LOCK position. The selec- tor lever must be in the P position be- fore pushing the key.

Once you remove the key, the engine im- mobilizer system is automatically set. (See Engine immobilizer system on page 14 in Section 12.)

When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the LOCK position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from underneath the luggage compartment for several minutes. This is normal opera- tion and does not indicate a malfunction. (See Leak detection pump on page x.)

It is not a malfunction if the needles on all meters and gauges move slightly when the key is turned to the ACC, ON or START position.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the ON position if the engine is not running. The battery will discharge and the ignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

159

Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This means you can only shift out of P position when the brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition switch in ON position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and key removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive possible)

4: Engine braking (shifting into overdrive not possible)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission

With the brake pedal depressed (The ignition switch must be in ON position.)

Shift normally.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

160

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in How to start the engine on page 356 in Section 3. The transmission must be in P or N.

Vehicles with fourwheel drive control

When the fourwheel drive control switch knob is in L4 (lowspeed position, center differential locked), the driving pattern se- lector setting has no effect on gear shift timing. (See Fourwheel drive system (fulltime fourwheel drive models) on page 164 in this Section for information of the fourwheel drive control.)

Vehicles with multimode control

When the multimode control switch knob is in L4 (lowspeed position, fourwheel drive, center differential locked), the driv- ing pattern selector setting has no effect on gear shift timing. (See Fourwheel drive system (multimode fourwheel drive models) on page 167 in this Section for information of the multimode control.)

2. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to D.

When the lever is in the D position, the automatic transmission system will select the most suitable gear for running condi- tions such as normal cruising, hill climb- ing, hard towing, etc.

Twowheel drive models

Always use the D position for better fuel economy and quieter driving. If the engine coolant temperature is low, the transmis- sion will not shift into the overdrive gear even in the D position.

Vehicles with fourwheel drive control

Always use the D position for better fuel economy and quieter driving. If the engine coolant temperature is low or when the fourwheel drive control switch knob is in L4 (lowspeed position, center differential locked), the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even in the D posi- tion. (See Fourwheel drive system (full time fourwheel drive models) on page 164 in this Section for information of the fourwheel drive control.)

Vehicles with multimode control

Always use the D position for better fuel economy and quieter driving. If the engine coolant temperature is low or when the multimode control switch knob is in L4 (lowspeed position, fourwheel drive, center differential locked), the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even in the D position. (See Fourwheel drive system (multimode fourwheel drive mod- els) on page 167 in this Section for in- formation of the multimode control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera- tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.

If the automatic locking operation linked with the shift position is set, all the side doors and back door are automatically locked when the shift lever is moved out of the P position with the engine running and all the side doors and back door are closed. For details, see Automatic door locking and unlocking functions on page 25 in Section 12.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

161

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshift the transmission as follows:

Shift into the 4 position. The trans- mission will downshift to fourth gear and engine braking will be enabled.

Shift into the 3 position. The trans- mission will downshift to third gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower than the following speed, and stronger engine braking will be en- abled.

Twowheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine 133 km/h (83 mph)

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine 139 km/h (86 mph)

Fourwheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine

Multimode control switch knob at H2 and H4

133 km/h (83 mph)

Multimode control switch knob at L4

51 km/h (31 mph)

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4

139 km/h (86 mph)

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4

54 km/h (34 mph)

Shift into the 2 position. The trans- mission will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower than the following speed, and stronger engine braking will be en- abled.

Twowheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine 88 km/h (54 mph)

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine 94 km/h (58 mph)

Fourwheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine

Multimode control switch knob at H2 and H4

88 km/h (54 mph)

Multimode control switch knob at L4

34 km/h (21 mph)

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4

94 km/h (58 mph)

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4

36 km/h (22 mph)

Shift into the L position. The trans- mission will downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower than the following speed, and maximum engine braking will be en- abled.

Twowheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine 42 km/h (26 mph)

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine 40 km/h (25 mph)

Fourwheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine

Multimode control switch knob at H2 and H4

42 km/h (26 mph)

Multimode control switch knob at L4

16 km/h (9 mph)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

162

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4

40 km/h (25 mph)

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4

15 km/h (9 mph)

When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from D to 4, engine braking will not be enabled be- cause the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed, see Cruise control on page 195 in this Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface. Abrupt shifting could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.

(d) Using 3, 2 and L positions

The 3, 2 and L positions are used for strong engine braking as described pre- viously.

With the selector lever in 3, 2 or L, you can start the vehicle in motion as with the lever in D.

With the selector lever in 3 or 2, the vehicle will start in first gear and automat- ically shift to third gear or second gear.

With the selector lever in L, the trans- mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

Be careful not to overrev the en- gine. Watch the tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the red zone. The approximate maximum al- lowable speed for each position is given below for your reference:

Twowheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine 3 146 km/h (90 mph). . . . . . . 2 100 km/h (62 mph). . . . . . . L 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . . . .

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine 3 146 km/h (90 mph). . . . . . . 2 100 km/h (62 mph). . . . . . . L 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . . . .

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

163

Fourwheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine

Multimode drive control switch knob at H2 or H4

3 146 km/h (90 mph). . . . . 2 100 km/h (62 mph). . . . . L 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . .

Multimode drive control switch knob at L4

3 57 km/h (35 mph). . . . . . 2 39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . L 22 km/h (14 mph). . . . . .

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4

3 146 km/h (90 mph). . . . . 2 100 km/h (62 mph). . . . . L 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . .

Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4

3 57 km/h (35 mph). . . . . . 2 39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . L 26 km/h (16 mph). . . . . .

Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long time in the 3, 2 or L position. This may cause severe automatic transmis- sion damage from overheating. To prevent such damage, 4 position should be used in hill climbing or hard towing.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the R position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve- hicle is moving.

Vehicles with rear view monitor system

When the selector lever is shifted into R position with the ignition switch in the ON position, rear view monitor system will activate. For instructions, see Rear view monitor system on page 302 in Sec- tion 110.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down, fully depress the parking brake pedal to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down, shift the selector lever to the P posi- tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector lever into P position under any cir- cumstances while the vehicle is mov- ing. Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may result.

If the automatic unlocking operation linked with the shift position is set, all the side doors and back door are automatically un- locked when the selector lever is moved to the P position with the ignition switch is in the ON position. For details, see Automatic door locking and unlocking functions on page 25 in Section 12.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

164

(g) Good driving practice

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between fourth gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope, shift the selector lever to the 4 posi- tion. Be sure to shift the selector lever to the D position immediately after- ward.

When towing a trailer, in order to main- tain engine braking efficiency, do not use D position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the vehicle using the accelerator ped- al, as this can cause the transmission to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le- ver out of P position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from the P position even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For instructions, see If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever on page 394 in Section 4.

Fourwheel drive control switch knob

Center differential lock switch

Fourwheel drive system (fulltime fourwheel drive models) (a) Fourwheel drive control

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

165

Use the fourwheel drive control switch knob and center differential lock switch to select the transfer and center differ- ential modes.

The H4 and L4 positions of the four wheel drive control switch knob provide either lock or unlock mode of the center differential depending on the center differ- ential lock switch position.

Use the center differential lock system if your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when you are driving on a slippery or bumpy surface. When the center differential is locked, the vehicle stability control system is automatically turned off and the center differential lock and VSC OFF indicator lights come on because the function that controls engine performance interferes with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lock switch is turned on, the VSC OFF indicator light comes on. After the wheels are out of the ditch or off the slippery or bumpy surface, turn the center differential lock switch off. Make sure that the center differential lock indicator light and vehicle stabil- ity control system off indicator light turn off.

H4 (high speed position, center differ- ential unlocked): Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4, center differential lock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on all types of roads, from dry hardsurfaced roads to wet, icy or snowcovered roads. This position gives greater economy, quietest ride, least wear and better vehicle control.

H4 (high speed position, center differ- ential locked): Fourwheel drive control switch knob at H4, center differential lock switch pushed in

Use this for greater traction when you experience a loss of power, such as wheel slipping, in the center differential unlock mode.

L4 (low speed position, center differ- ential unlocked): Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4, center differential lock switch left out

The 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator light comes on when the L4 mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for climbing or descending steep hills, offroad driving, and hard pulling in sand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc- curs when the wheels are negotiating a sharp corner is further reduced than in the L4 (low speed position, center differential locked) mode.

L4 (low speed position, center differ- ential locked): Fourwheel drive control switch knob at L4, center differential lock switch pushed in

The 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator light comes on when the L4 mode is selected.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

166

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for hard pulling in situations the vehicle cannot negotiate even in the L4 (low speed position, center differential un- locked) mode. Also, using this mode when driving down steep offroad inclines will help contribute to increased vehicle stabil- ity.

The indicator light tells when the differen- tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ- ential is not still locked as long as the indicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, the indicator blinks. If the indicator light does not go off when you push out the center differential lock switch, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op- eration is not completed within 5 seconds while the cruise control system is set, cancel the cruise control system. To can- cel the cruise control system, see Cruise control on page 195 in Section 17.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the center differential lock system.

See (b) Shifting procedure for further in- structions.

SHIFTING BETWEEN H4 (UNLOCKED) AND H4 (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock modes in H4, push the center differen- tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN L4 (UNLOCKED) AND L4 (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock modes in L4, push the center differen- tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN H4 AND L4

To shift from H4 to L4, bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the automatic transmission selector lever into N and push and turn the fourwheel drive control switch knob fully clockwise.

To shift from L4 to H4, bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the automatic transmission selector lever into N and turn the fourwheel drive control switch knob fully counterclockwise.

If the 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator light continues to blink when you operate the fourwheel drive control switch knob to the H4 or L4 position, drive forward or backward in a short dis- tance, then stop the vehicle completely, shift the automatic transmission selector lever securely into N and operate the switch knob again.

If the indicator continues to blink even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the fourwheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the fourwheel drive control switch knob if the wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping or spin- ning before operating.

(b) Shifting procedure

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

167

Multimode control switch knob

Center differential lock switch

Use the multimode control switch knob and center differential lock switch to select the transfer and center differ- ential modes.

The H4 and L4 positions of the multi mode control switch knob provide either lock or unlock mode of the center differen- tial depending on the center differential lock switch position.

Use the center differential lock system if your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when you are driving on a slippery or bumpy surface. When the center differential is locked, the vehicle stability control system is automatically turned off and the center differential lock and VSC OFF indicator lights come on because the function that controls engine performance interferes with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lock switch is turned on, the VSC OFF indicator light comes on. After the wheels are out of the ditch or off the slippery or bumpy surface, turn the center differential lock switch off. Make sure that the center differential lock indicator light and vehicle stabil- ity control system off indicator light turn off.

Fourwheel drive system (multimode fourwheel drive models) (a) Multimode control

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

168

H2 (high speed position, twowheel drive, center differential unlocked): Mul- timode control switch knob at H2, cen- ter differential lock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on dry hard surfaced roads. This position gives greater economy, quietest ride, least wear and better vehicle control.

H4 (high speed position, fourwheel drive, center differential unlocked): Mul- timode control switch knob at H4, cen- ter differential lock switch left out

The fourwheel drive indicator light comes on when the H4 mode is selected.

Use this for normal driving on all types of roads, from dry hardsurfaced roads to wet, icy or snowcovered roads. This position provides greater traction than twowheel drive.

H4 (high speed position, fourwheel drive, center differential locked): Multi mode control switch knob at H4, center differential lock switch pushed in

The fourwheel drive indicator light comes on when the H4 mode is selected.

Use this for greater traction when you experience a loss of power, such as wheel slipping, in the center differential unlock mode.

L4 (low speed position, fourwheel drive, center differential unlocked): Mul- timode control switch knob at L4, cen- ter differential lock switch left out

The fourwheel drive and 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator lights come on when the L4 mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for climbing or descending steep hills, offroad driving, and hard pulling in sand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc- curs when the wheels are negotiating a sharp corner is further reduced than in the L4 (low speed position, fourwheel drive, center differential locked) mode.

L4 (low speed position, fourwheel drive, center differential locked): Multi mode control switch knob at L4, center differential lock switch pushed in

The fourwheel drive and 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator lights come on when the L4 mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for hard pulling in situations the vehicle cannot negotiate even in the L4 (low speed position, fourwheel drive, cen- ter differential unlocked) mode. Also, using this mode when driving down steep off road inclines will help contribute to in- creased vehicle stability.

The indicator light tells when the differen- tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ- ential is not still locked as long as the indicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, the indicator blinks. If the indicator light does not go off when you push out the center differential lock switch, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op- eration is not completed within 5 seconds while the cruise control system is set, cancel the cruise control system. To can- cel the cruise control system, see Cruise control on page 195 in Section 17.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the center differential lock system.

See (c) Shifting procedure for further in- structions.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

169

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disen- gaged by the shifting operations de- scribed in (c) Shifting procedure.

You should drive in fourwheel drive for at least 16 km (10 miles) each month. This will assure that the front drive com- ponents are lubricated.

SHIFTING BETWEEN H2 AND H4 (UNLOCKED)

To shift from H2 to H4 (unlocked), reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62 mph) and turn the multimode control switch knob fully clockwise.

If the fourwheel drive indicator light con- tinues to blink when you operate the mul- timode control switch knob from the H2 to the H4 position, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not securely in H4 mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler- ating or decelerating.

If the fourwheel drive indicator light con- tinues to blink and the buzzer sounds when you operate the multimode control switch knob from the H2 to the H4 position, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not in H4 mode. Stop the ve- hicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62 mph). Operate the switch knob again.

To shift from H4 (unlocked) to H2, turn the multimode control switch knob fully counterclockwise.

This can be done at any speed.

If the fourwheel drive indicator light con- tinues to blink when you operate the mul- timode control switch knob from the H4 to the H2 position, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not securely in H2 mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler- ating or decelerating, or drive forward or backward in a short distance.

If the indicator light continues to blink even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the fourwheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the multimode control switch knob if the wheels are slip- ping. Stop the slipping or spinning before operating.

(b) A.D.D. (automatic disconnecting differential) (c) Shifting procedure

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

170

SHIFTING BETWEEN H4 (UNLOCKED) AND H4 (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock modes in H4, push the center differen- tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN L4 (UNLOCKED) AND L4 (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock modes in L4, push the center differen- tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN H4 AND L4

To shift from H4 to L4, bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the automatic transmission selector lever into N and push and turn the multimode control switch knob fully clockwise.

To shift from L4 to H4, bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the automatic transmission selector lever into N and turn the multimode control switch knob counterclockwise.

If the 4LO (low speed fourwheel drive) indicator light continues to blink when you operate the multimode control switch knob to the H4 or L4 position, drive forward or backward in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, shift the automatic transmission selector lever se- curely into N and operate the switch knob again.

If the indicator continues to blink even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the fourwheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the multimode control switch knob if the wheels are slip- ping. Stop the slipping or spinning before operating.

The traction control system automatical- ly helps prevent the spinning of rear wheels when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to ON, the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi- tions, full traction of the vehicle and power to the rear wheels cannot be maintained, even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which may cause the vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the present road condi- tions.

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

171

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during ordinary driving so that it can operate when needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the trac- tion control system is in the selfcheck mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper- ating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the rear wheels. At this time, the slip indi- cator light blinks.

You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the traction control system, the AUTO LSD system, the vehicle stability control system and the hillstart assist control system such as on slippery roads. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the traction control system can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the slip indicator light will come on and the traction control system temporarily stops operating in order to protect the brake actuator. (Although the traction control system does not operate, there is no problem to continue your driv- ing.) The system will be automatically re- stored after a short time and the slip indi- cator light goes out.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

172

VSC TRAC warning light

This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

Traction control system

AUTO LSD system

Vehicle stability control system

Hillstart assist control system

When the system is normal and the igni- tion key is turned to ON, the VSC TRAC warning light will come on and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to ON.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

If the VSC TRAC warning light and slip indicator light come on while driving, the traction control system does not work. However, as normal braking operates when being applied, there is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

The active traction control system auto- matically helps prevent the spinning of 4 wheels when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to ON, the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi- tions, full traction of the vehicle and power to the 4 wheels cannot be maintained, even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which may cause the vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the present road condi- tions.

Active traction control system

(fourwheel drive models)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

173

Leave the system on during the ordi- nary driving so that it can operate when needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the ac- tive traction control system is in the self check mode, but does not indicate a mal- function.

When the active traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the 4 wheels. At this time, the slip indica- tor light blinks.

You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the active traction control system, the vehicle stabil- ity control system, the downhill assist con- trol system and the hillstart assist control system such as on slippery roads. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any of the systems is operat- ing, a buzzer will start to sound intermit- tently to indicate that the active traction control system can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time, the slip indicator light will come on and the active traction control system temporarily stops operating in or- der to protect the brake actuator. (Al- though the active traction control system does not operate, there is no problem to continue your driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and the slip indicator light goes out.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

174

VSC TRAC warning light

This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

Active traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system

Hillstart assist control system

When the system is normal and the igni- tion key is turned to ON, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the VSC TRAC warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to ON.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

If the VSC TRAC warning light and slip indicator light come on while driving, the active traction control system does not work. However, as normal braking oper- ates when being applied, there is no prob- lem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

The AUTO LSD system aids traction by using the traction control system to control engine performance and braking when one of the rear wheels begins to spin.

This system is used only when wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or on a rough surface.

This system is effective in case one of the rear wheels is spinning.

AUTO LSD system (twowheel drive models)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

175

NOTICE

Do not use the AUTO LSD system in conditions other than the above. A much greater steering effort and more careful cornering control will be re- quired.

To activate the system, push the AUTO LSD switch with the vehicle stopped.

The AUTO LSD system is activated when driving at a speed under 100 km/h (62 mph). At this time, the AUTO LSD indicator light will come on.

To cancel the system, push the AUTO LSD switch once again.

If the engine is turned off while the AUTO LSD indicator light is on and then restarted, the indicator light will turn off automatically.

Make sure the AUTO LSD indicator light comes on under the above condition when you use the AUTO LSD system.

The slip indicator light blinks when the system is controlling the spinning of the rear wheels.

The AUTO LSD and slip indicator lights come on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If the indi- cator lights does not come on when the ignition key is turned to ON, contact your Toyota dealer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

176

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the AUTO LSD system, the traction control system and the vehicle stability control system such as on slippery roads. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the AUTO LSD system can no longer operate. In this case, immedi- ately stop your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the slip indicator light will come on and the AUTO LSD system temporarily stops operating in order to protect the brake actuator. (Although the AUTO LSD system does not operate, it is no problem to continue driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and the slip indicator light goes off.

VSC TRAC warning light

This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

AUTO LSD system

Traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

When the system is normal and the igni- tion key is turned to ON, the light will come on and will go off after a few sec- onds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to ON.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

If the VSC TRAC warning light and slip indicator light comes on while driving, the AUTO LSD system does not work. How- ever, as the brakes operate normally when applied, it is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

NOTICE

Do not drive with the AUTO LSD switch continuously turned on.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

177

The vehicle stability control system helps provide integrated control of the systems such as antilock brake sys- tem, traction control, engine control, etc. This system automatically controls the output of the brakes or engine to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road sur- face or operating steering wheel abrupt- ly.

This vehicle stability control activates when the vehicle speed is more than 15 km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the sys- tem is in the selfcheck mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the ve- hicle stability control system. Even if the vehicle stability control sys- tem is operating, you must always drive carefully and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless driv- ing will result in an unexpected ac- cident. If the slip indicator light blinks and an alarm sounds, special care should be taken while driving.

Only use tires of specified size. The size, manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires should be the same. If you use the tires other than specified, or different type or size, the vehicle stability control system may not function correctly. When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your Toyota dealer. (See Checking and replacing tires on page 427 in Section 72.)

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv- ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an alarm sounds intermittently. Special care should be taken while driving.

If the brake pedal is depressed while the vehicle stability control system is active, the brake pedal will become hard at an earlier position than usual. However, the brakes will respond to the pedal force if depressed further.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Vehicle stability control system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

178

Fourwheel drive models only

Pushing the center differential lock switch automatically turns the vehicle stability control system off. At this time, the VSC OFF indicator comes on with the center differential lock indi- cator light.

The VSC OFF indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. It will come on again when you push the center differential lock switch to turn off the system.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The indicator light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to ON.

The indicator light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The indicator light comes on when the system is on while driving.

NOTICE

Make sure that the center differential lock indicator light goes off before normal driving. VSC TRAC warning light

This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

Vehicle stability control system

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

AUTO LSD system (twowheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

179

The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to ON, and will go off after about a few seconds.

The light may come on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to ON. It is normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.

If the VSC TRAC waning light and slip indicator light come on while driving, the vehicle stability control system does not work. However, as normal braking oper- ates when being applied, there is no prob- lem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

The downhill assist control system is a system that assists the deceleration of the engine brake when you drive down a steep hill. When you are driving down a hill with the fourwheel drive control switch knob (fulltime fourwheel drive models) or multimode control switch knob (multimode fourwheel drive models) in the L4 position, push the DAC switch to limit the vehicles ac- celeration. If the vehicle is traveling at a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less, you can descend at a constant speed.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the down- hill assist control system. It may not be able to maintain a low speed over road surfaces or offroad surfaces on which sliding can easily occur, such as extremely steep slopes or icy or muddy roads.

TO ACTIVATE THE DOWNHILL ASSIST CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Fulltime fourwheel drive models Turn the fourwheel drive control switch knob to the L4 position.

The system will not operate if the four wheel drive control switch knob is in the H4 position.

Multimode fourwheel drive mod- elsTurn the multimode control switch knob to the L4 position.

The system will not operate if the multi mode control switch knob is in the H4 position.

2. In order to make full use of the en- gine brake, putting the transmission in L or 2 is recommended.

The system will operate even if the trans- mission selector lever is in D, 4, 3 or N. However, when it is in L or 2 the engine brake can also be utilized en- abling the system to operate more effec- tively.

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

180

3. Push the DAC switch to turn the system on. The downhill assist con- trol system indicator light on the in- strument panel will come on.

Fulltime fourwheel drive modelsIf the downhill assist control system indicator light flashes, the selector lever may be in N or the fourwheel drive control switch knob may be in the H4 position.

If the indicator light does not come on when the switch is pushed, contact your Toyota dealer.

Multimode fourwheel drive modelsIf the downhill assist control system indica- tor light flashes, the selector lever may be in N or the multimode control switch knob may be in the H2 or H4 position.

If the indicator light does not come on when the switch is pushed, contact your Toyota dealer.

With the vehicle traveling at a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less, release your foot from the accelerator or brake pedal to activate the system. The vehicle will descend the hill at a low speed. While the system is operating, the slip indicator light on the instrument panel will flash and the stop lights and high mounted stoplight will be lit.

If you push the DAC switch to turn the system off while it is in operation, the system will stop operating gradually. The downhill assist control system indicator light will flash to alert the driver. To con- tinue driving at a low speed, push the DAC switch to turn the system on.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

181

The slip indicator light and downhill assist control system indicator light come on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If any of the indicator lights does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the hill start assist control system, the active traction control system and the vehicle stability control system. If the brake ac- tuator temperature becomes too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the downhill assist control system can no longer operate. In this case, stop your vehicle immediately at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At this time, the slip indicator light will come on, the downhill assist control sys- tem indicator light flash and the downhill assist control system stops operating tem- porarily in order to protect the brake ac- tuator. (Although the downhill assist con- trol system does not operate, it is no problem to continue your driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and the slip indicator light and the downhill assist control system in- dicator light go out.

If there is any abnormality in the sys- tem, the VSC TRAC warning light will come on. When the DAC switch is pushed, the downhill assist control sys- tem indicator light also flash.

If the VSC TRAC warning light comes on, there may be an abnormality in any of the following systems in addition to the downhill assist control system.

Hillstart assist control system

Active traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

182

VSC TRAC warning light

When the system is normal and the igni- tion key is turned to ON, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

If the warning light comes on while driv- ing, the system does not work. However, as normal braking operates when being applied, it is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

The hillstart assist control system as- sists you in starting to move up a steep or slippery hill. When you start to move up the hill slope, the system helps to prevent the vehicle from roll- ing backward in the interval while you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the hill start assist control system. The ve- hicle may not be able to start smoothly on road surfaces or off road surfaces such as extremely steep slopes or icy roads, on which sliding can occur very easily.

Do not use the hillstart assist con- trol system to stop the vehicle. This system is not designed as a func- tion for stopping the vehicle on a uphill slope.

The hillstart assist control system will operate for 5 seconds maximally when all of the following conditions apply.

When the transmission is in any of positions D, 4, 3, 2 or L

When the brake pedal is not de- pressed

The system is designed to operate when the vehicle is starting on an uphill slope; therefore, if the transmission is in P or N it will not operate. It will not operate either if the vehicle starts to move in reverse on a slope with the transmission in the R.

Hillstart assist control system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

183

When the hillstart assist control system is operating, the slip indicator light flashes and an alarm sounds intermittently. At the same time, the stop lights and high mounted stoplight are lit.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON. If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Keep in mind the following when driv- ing.

The hillstart assist control system op- erates for 5 seconds maximally. If both the brake and accelerator pedals re- main undepressed for longer than 5 seconds, the buzzer will sound at more frequent intervals and the system will gradually stop operating.

The hillstart assist control system is not designed as a function for stopping the vehicle on a uphill slope. When stopping the vehicle, be sure to de- press the brake pedal.

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models), the traction control system (two wheel drive models), the active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), the vehicle stability control system and the AUTO LSD system (twowheel drive models) on such as slippery roads. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any of the systems is operat- ing, a buzzer will start to sound intermit- tently to indicate that the hillstart assist control system can no longer operate. In this case, stop your vehicle immediately at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At this time, the slip indicator light will come on and the hillstart assist control system stops operating temporarily in or- der to protect the brake actuator. (Al- though the hillstart assist control system does not operate, it is no problem to con- tinue your driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and the slip indicator light goes out.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

184

If there is any abnormality in the sys- tem, the VSC TRAC warning light will come on.

If the system malfunctions, the VSC TRAC warning light will come on.

If the VSC TRAC warning light comes on, there may be an abnormality in any of the following systems in addition to the hillstart assist control system.

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

AUTO LSD system (twowheel drive models)

VSC TRAC warning light

When the system is normal and the igni- tion key is turned to ON, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to ON.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

If the warning light comes on while driv- ing, the system does not work. However, as normal braking operates when being applied, it is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to ON.

The warning light comes on while driv- ing.

This rear height control air suspension controls the vehicle height depending on the vehicle driving conditions. Select your desired height among the HI (high), N (normal) and LO (low) modes with the height select switch.

(a) Vehicle height modes

N (normal) mode

The vehicle height in this mode is stan- dard. Regardless of the number of occu- pants or the luggage loading condition, the vehicle height is always automatically ad- justed to a fixed height in this mode while the engine is running.

This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.

Rear height control air suspension

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

185

HI (high) mode

The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6 in.) higher at rear than the N mode height.

This mode is suitable when driving on the bumpy roads and through water.

However, when the vehicle speed exceeds about 30 km/h (19 mph) or over in the HI mode, the N mode is automatically selected.

CAUTION

The HI mode should be used for severe offroad driving condition only. Because the vehicles center of gravity is higher in this setting, the vehicle may become unstable when turning abruptly, resulting in accident.

LO (low) mode

The vehicle height is about 20 mm (0.8 in.) lower at rear than the N mode height.

This mode allows you easy access to the vehicle (getting in and out) and easy load- ing and unloading operation.

This mode is available when the vehicle speed is under about 12 km/h (7 mph).

NOTICE

Use the LO mode when the vehicle is stopped. Otherwise, when the ve- hicle speed exceeds about 12 km/h (7 mph), N mode is selected automati- cally. So be careful when you drive in any place where the overhead height is limited.

(b) Vehicle height mode changing con- dition

To change the vehicle height, it is neces- sary to meet the following conditions.

The engine should be running.

The height control OFF indicator light should go off.

When selecting a mode, there is a ve- hicle speed limit. Refer to the following table.

Yes = The mode can be selected. No = The mode cannot be selected.

LO mode

N mode

HI mode

Under about 12 km/h (7 mph)

Yes Yes Yes

Under about 30 km/h (19 mph)

No Yes Yes

About 30 km/h (19 mph) or over

No Yes No

In the following cases, the rear height control suspension will not operate.

The underbody of the vehicle has touched the surface on bumpy roads.

The area around the rear suspension is coated with ice.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

186

If the vehicle is moved to its usual loca- tion or the ice is removed and the height select switch is pressed, the vehicle height control cannot be operated. In this case, turn off and restart the engine, then push the control switches.

(c) Vehicle height adjustment

To change the mode, push the height select switch on either side of (higher) or (lower).

The height control indicator light indicates which mode is selected. (See (e) Height control indicator light described below.)

Selecting the HI mode

Push the height select switch on the side when the vehicle speed is under about 30 km/h (19 mph).

To change the N mode to HI, push the switch once.

To change the LO mode to HI, push the switch twice. It takes about 30 sec- onds until the LO mode changes to the HI mode.

Selecting the N mode

To change the HI mode to N, push the height select switch on the side once.

To change the LO mode to N, push the height select switch on the side once.

Selecting the LO mode

Push the height select switch on the side while the vehicle is stopped.

To change the N mode to LO, push the switch once.

To change the HI mode to LO, push the switch twice.

Even if the engine is stopped while the vehicle height is being lowered, the opera- tion continues for up to 25 seconds. If, within this 25 seconds, any of the side doors or the back door is opened, opera- tion will continue for a further 15 seconds.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

187

NOTICE

If the vehicle height is changed fre- quently when the vehicle is heavily loaded, the compressor may over- heat, causing the vehicle height ad- justment operation to stop.

Before you lower the vehicle height with the height select switch, check under the vehicle to make sure nothing to damage the vehicle or no one to be injured is there and that the underbody of the vehicle does not touch the ground.

After unloading, the height of a ve- hicle equipped with the rear height control air suspension becomes slightly higher than the normal ve- hicle height. Take sufficient care where the overhead height is re- stricted.

Do not select the LO mode in the bumpy roads. If the underbody of the vehicle touches the rugged road surface, the vehicle may be dam- aged.

(d) Turning off the rear height control air suspension

To turn off the rear height control air suspension with the vehicle stopped, push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch. The height control OFF indi- cator light comes on and the vehicle height is fixed in the same mode as the height control switch is pushed.

This status is memorized in the system even after the engine is stopped.

If you push the switch again, the height control OFF indicator light goes out and the rear height control air suspension is turned on.

Even after the rear height control air sus- pension is turned off with the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch, if the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (19 mph), the rear height control air suspension automat- ically selects the N mode.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

188

CAUTION

If you drive through deep water over about 700 mm (28 in.) in depth, put the vehicle height in the HI mode with the height select switch and then turn off the rear height control air suspension by pushing the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch.

NOTICE

When jacking up or installing tire chains, be sure to turn off the rear height control air suspension by pushing the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch and stop the engine. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change because of the automatic leveling function, resulting in an un- expected accident.

If your vehicle must be towed, put the vehicle height in the N mode and turn off the rear height control air suspension. Otherwise, the ve- hicle height may change because of the automatic leveling function, re- sulting in an unexpected accident.

If your vehicle gets ditched, turn off the rear height control air suspen- sion with the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change because of the automatic leveling function resulting in an unexpected accident.

(e) Height control indicator lights

1. Height control indicator lights

2. Height control OFF indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned on, all the indicator lights come on. The indicator light showing the present mode only re- mains on and all other lights go off after a few seconds. This means the system operates correctly.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

189

If you change the vehicle height mode, the indicator lights change as follows:

When changing the vehicle height from the N mode to HI:

1. The N mode indicator light goes off and the HI mode indicator light blinks.

2. After the vehicle height control reaches the HI mode, the HI mode indicator light remains on.

If the underbody of the vehicle has touched the surface on bumpy roads or the area around the rear suspension is coated with ice, the vehicle height cannot be lowered with the height select switch. The height control indicator lights change as follows:

1. The present mode indicator light goes off and the selected mode indicator light blinks.

2. The selected mode indicator light goes off. (The vehicle height does not change.) The present mode indicator light comes on again.

In this case, even if the vehicle is moved to its usual location or the ice is removed and the height select switch is pressed, vehicle height control cannot be operated. Turn off the engine once and then restart it.

Height control OFF indicator light: When the ignition switch is turned on, this light comes on. If it goes out after a few seconds, the rear height control air sus- pension operates correctly. If you push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch, the rear height control air suspension is turned off. The height control OFF indicator light comes on.

In the following cases, there is a problem somewhere in the rear height control air suspension. Although there is no problem to continue normal driving, have the rear height control air suspension checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The height control OFF indicator light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned on.

The height control OFF indicator light blinks.

(f) Parking and stopping tips

If you immediately stop the engine to park the vehicle after offroad driving, the ve- hicle height is lowered slightly as the ve- hicle becomes cool. When parking, make sure there is nothing that will be in con- tact with the underbody of the vehicle. When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous height.

If you park the vehicle for a long time, the vehicle height may be gradually low- ered. When parking for a long time, make sure there is nothing that will be in con- tact with the underbody of the vehicle. When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous height.

If you stop the engine, the vehicle height may change in accordance with the change in the temperature. When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous height.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

190

(g) Rear height control failure warning

If there is a problem somewhere in the rear height control air suspension, the N mode is automatically selected. If this oc- curs, the height control OFF indicator light blinks and the vehicle height control cannot be activated until the malfunction is corrected. If this is the case, bring your vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as possible and have it checked.

The tire pressure warning system is de- signed to provide warning when tire inflation pressure of one or more of your tires (including the spare tire) is low. The low tire pressure warning light comes on to inform you that low tire inflation pressure may hamper driving.

Type A

Type B

Tire pressure warning system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

191

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT

This light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It goes off after a few seconds. This indicates that the tire pressure warning system is func- tioning properly.

If the low tire pressure warning light comes on or blinks, do the following.

If the warning light comes on:

Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and check that the inflation pressure of all tires (including the spare tire) is as specified on the tire and loading information label. (See Checking tire inflation pressure on page 425 in Section 72.) If the warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, you may have a flat tire. If you have a flat tire, replace it with the spare tire. For details, see If you have a flat tire on page 379 in Section 4.

The warning light goes off a few minutes after air is put into the deflated tire.

This warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire pressure changes caused by tem- perature. In this case, adjusting the tire pressure will turn off the warning light.

CAUTION

When the tire pressure warning light comes on, observe the following in- structions:

Depending on the conditions, re- duce to an appropriate speed as soon as possible.

Adjust the tire pressure to the spe- cified level as soon as possible.

Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneu- vering and braking. Tire deteriora- tion may reduce steering wheel con- trol and brake effectiveness. This may lead to serious injury or death.

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately if sud- den bursts of air leakage occur.

NOTICE

Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as air pressure sensors will be damaged.

When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have them repaired or re- placed by the nearest Toyota dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure sensors will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.

The tire pressure warning system is not to be used as a substitute for regular inspections. Be sure to check the air pressure in the tires on a regular basis.

When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for air pres- sure sensors as well.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

192

If the warning light blinks:

The tire pressure warning system may be malfunctioning. Contact your Toyota dealer.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

The tire pressure warning system does not function properly under certain cir- cumstances. In the following cases, the low tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pres- sure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

Electric devices or facilities using simi- lar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

A radio set to similar frequencies is in use.

A lot of snow or ice covers the ve- hicle, in particular, around the wheels or wheel housings.

The tires are not equipped with an air pressure sensor.

Snow tires or tire chains are used.

Nongenuine Toyota wheels are used.

The sensor battery is expired.

Radio waves from the air pressure sen- sor installed on the spare tire cannot be received.

CAUTION

The use of nongenuine wheels will cause the air pressure sensors to transmit the electronic code in dif- ferent manner, resulting in the sys- tem failure.

The use of different type of tires with genuine wheels may also cause the malfunction of the sys- tem.

CAUTION

Each tire, including the spare (if pro- vided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label), you should determine the proper tire infla- tion pressure for those tires.)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

193

As an added safety feature, your ve- hicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS tire pressure warning system) that il- luminates a low tire pressure telltale (low tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is signifi- cantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (low tire pressure warning light) illu- minates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping abili- ty.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pres- sure warning system) is not a substi- tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (low tire pressure warning light).

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- ing interference that may cause unde- sired operation.

NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec- tion against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc- tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer- ence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is en- couraged to try to correct the interfer- ence by one or more of the following measures:

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

194

Reorient or relocate the receiving an- tenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equip- ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

When replacing the wheels, be sure to install air pressure sensors on the wheels.

There are 3 ways to set up the air pres- sure sensors:

a. Remove the sensor from the old wheel and install it to the new wheel.

b. Keep the same wheel with air pressure sensor and replace only the tire.

c. Use a new wheel and sensor. In this case, you have to register an ID code for a new sensor.

CAUTION

Have the tires, wheels or sensors re- placed and ID codes registered by a Toyota dealer. If you need sensors, purchase from a Toyota dealer.

When parking, firmly apply the parking brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brake pedal. For better holding power, first de- press the brake pedal and hold it while setting the parking brake. To release: Depress the parking brake pedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake is set, the parking brake reminder light in the instrument panel remains on until you release the parking brake.

Replacing tires and wheels Parking brake

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

195

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the park- ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control is designed to main- tain a set cruising speed without requir- ing the driver to operate the accelera- tor. Cruising speed can be set to any speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

Within the limits of the engines capabili- ties, cruising speed can be maintained up or down grades. However, changes in ve- hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle, do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slip- pery (rainy, icy or snowcovered) or winding roads.

Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise control then downshift the transmission to use engine braking to slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

To turn the cruise control on, press the ONOFF button. The CRUISE indicator light on the instrument panel will come on to indicate that the cruise control is opera- tional. Pressing the ONOFF button again turns the system off.

When the system is turned off, cruising speed must be reset when the cruise con- trol is turned on again.

Cruise control

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

196

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging the cruise control, turn the system off when it is not in use. Make sure the CRUISE indicator light is off.

SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED

The transmission must be in D or 4 before you set the cruising speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed, push the lever down in the SET direc- tion and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. If the speed is not satisfac- tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed, or tap it down for a slower speed. Each tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you need accelerationfor example, when passingdepress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release it, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior to the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL

The cruise control may be temporarily cancelled by the driver or by the system itself under certain circumstances. Tempo- rary cancellation allows the set cruising speed to remain in memory.

The cruise control can be temporarily can- celled by doing the following:

Pulling the lever in the CANCEL di- rection and releasing it

Depressing the brake pedal

Under certain circumstances, the cruise control is temporarily cancelled:

When vehicle speed falls below 40 km/h (25 mph)

When vehicle stability control is acti- vated

When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the set speed, the cruise con- trol is cancelled and the set speed is erased from memory.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

197

The CRUISE indicator light remains on to indicate that the system is still in op- eration.

To turn the cruise control off, press the ONOFF button. Make sure the CRUISE indicator light is off.

If the cruise control automatically cancels out other than for the above cases, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal- er at the earliest opportunity.

RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control is temporarily can- celled, the cruising speed can be resumed by pushing the lever up in the + RES direction.

Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25 mph).

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the + RES direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac- celerate the vehicle and then push the lever down in the SET direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the SET direc- tion and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held down, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de- press the brake pedal and then push the lever down in the SET direction.

Even if you downshift from D to 4, with the cruise control on, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the CRUISE indicator light flashes when using the cruise control, press the ONOFF button to turn the system off and then press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc- curs, there is some trouble in the cruise control system.

The indicator light does not come on.

The indicator light flashes again.

The indicator light goes out after it comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

198

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

199

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Audio system Reference 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUX adapter 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat entertainment system 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio/video system operating hints 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.

SECTION 1 8

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

200

Type 1: AMFM radio/compact disc player (with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2: AMFM radio/compact disc player with changer (with XM satellite radio con- troller)

: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

Type 3: AMFM radio/compact disc player with changer (with XM satellite radio con- troller)

: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

Reference

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

201

This section describes some of the basic features on Toyota audio systems. Some information may not pertain to your sys- tem.

Your audio system works when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push PWRVOL to turn the audio system on and off.

Push AM, FM1, FM2, FM, AMSAT

or DISCAUX to turn on that function without pushing PWRVOL.

You can turn on the compact disc player by inserting a compact disc.

You can turn off the compact disc player by ejecting the compact disc. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire audio system will be turned off when you eject the compact disc. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push AM, FM1, FM2, FM, AMSAT

or DISCAUX if the system is already on but you want to switch from one function to another. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

LISTENING TO THE XM SATELLITE RADIO BROADCAST (type 2 and 3)

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in your vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota satellite receiver and antenna (or equiva- lents) must be purchased and installed. A subscription to the XM satellite radio ser- vice is also necessary.

How to subscribe to an XM satellite radio

An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states.

How to subscribe: You must enter into a separate service agreement with the XM radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional activation and ser- vice subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the ve- hicle and optional digital satellite tuner. For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to the XM radio, visit XM on the web at www.xmradio.com or call an XMs Listener Care at (800) 8529696. The XM radio is solely responsible for the quality, availabil- ity and content of the satellite radio ser- vices provided, which are subject to the terms and conditions of the XM radio cus- tomer service agreement.

Customers should have their radio ID ready; the radio ID can be found by tun- ing to channel 000 on the radio. For details, see Displaying the radio ID be- low.

All fees and programming are the respon- sibility of the XM satellite radio and are subject to change.

Using your audio system Some basics

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

202

Satellite tuner technology notice: Toyotas satellite radio tuners are awarded Type Approval Certificates from XM Satel- lite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility with the services offered by the XM satel- lite radio.

Displaying the radio ID

Each XM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID. You will need the radio ID when activating XM service or when reporting a problem.

If you select the CH 000 using the TUNE knob, the ID code of 8 alphanu- meric characters appears. If you select another channel, display of the ID code is canceled. The channel (000) alternates the display between the radio ID and the spe- cific radio ID code. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your systems tone and balance controls, see the description of your own system.

SRS

Type 1 and 2 audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS and SRS TruBass audio enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all mode except AM radio mode.

FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds to you is largely determined by the mix of the treble, midrange and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with differ- ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the vol- ume of one group of sounds while de- creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has an antenna printed on the inside of the rear quarter window.

NOTICE

Putting a film (especially a conductive or metallic film) on the rear quarter window will noticeably reduce the sensitivity of the radio.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

203

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it in with the label side up. The compact disc player will play from track 1 through to the end of the disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact disc player. Do not insert anything other than com- pact discs into the slot.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH CHANGER (type 2 and 3)

When you insert a disc, push the LOAD button and gently push the disc in with the label side up. This compact disc play- er can store up to six discs. The player will play from track 1 through to the end of the disc. Then it will play from track 1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

Do not stack up two discs for in- sertion, or it will cause damage to the compact disc player. Insert only one compact disc into slot at a time.

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact disc player. Do not insert anything except a com- pact disc into the slot.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

204

Details of specific buttons, controls and features are described in the alphabetical list that follows.

Controls and features Type 1

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

205

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in the desired station. (See TUNEFILE or SEEK/TRACK.) Push and hold down the button until you hear a beepthis will set the station to the button. The preset but- ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button for the station you want. The preset but- ton number and station frequency will ap- pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and two FM stations for each button. (The display will show AM, FM1 or FM2 when you push AM, FM1 or FM2 button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button to eject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fastforward button)

Push and hold (preset button 6) or

(preset button 5) to fastforward or reverse within a compact disc. When you release the button, the compact disc play- er will resume playing.

AM

Push the AM button to turn on the radio and select the AM band. AM will appear on the display.

AUDIO CONT (Tone and sound balance controls)

Each time you push the AUDIO CONT knob, the mode changes. To adjust the tone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts lowpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts highpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. The display ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. The display ranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can be turned on by turning the knob. In addi- tion, turning the knob allows you to select from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and tone settings. The ASL system automati- cally adjusts volume and tone in accor- dance with the driving speed. This helps ensure an optimal listening experience even if noise levels rise while driving.

DISCAUX (Compact disc)

Push the DISCAUX button to play a compact disc.

When the audio system is set to compact disc operation, the display shows the track number currently being played.

Vehicles with AUX adapter

To switch between CD, DVD, and AUX (external device) modes, press the DISCAUX button. The AUX mode is only available when AUX adapter is connected to the system. When the AUX adapter is in use, AUX will appear on the display.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

206

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- tem will display following error messages.

WAIT: The compact disc player unit may be too hot. Allow the player to cool down.

ERROR 1: The disc may be dirty, dam- aged or inserted incorrectly (upside down). Clean the disc and reinsert it.

NO DISC: The compact disc changer of the separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

ERROR 3: There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.

ERROR 4: Overcurrent. Ask your Toyota dealer to inspect.

CD OPEN: The compact disc changer lid of the separate unit is open. Close the compact disc changer lid.

If NO MUSIC appears on the display, it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA data has been inserted. Remove the disc from the player and insert an MP3/WMA data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

DISC

With compact disc changer only

Use these buttons to select a disc you want to listen to.

Push (preset button 3) or (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the FM1 or FM2 button to turn on the radio and select the FM band. FM1 or FM2 will appear on the display. This system allows you to set twelve FM sta- tions, two for each of the preset button.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder: Push either side of the FOLDER several times until the number of the folder you want to listen to appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the current folder: Push and hold the side of the button until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio data (CDDA) and MP3/WMA files, audio data (CDDA) is played.

PWRVOL (Power and Volume)

Push PWRVOL to turn the audio system on and off. Turn PWRVOL to adjust the volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random featuresyou can either listen to the tracks on one compact disc in random order, or listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random order: Quickly push and release RAND (preset button 1). will appear on the display and the player will perform the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order. To turn off the random fea- ture, push this button again.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

207

With compact disc changer only

To play all the tracks in the magazine in random order: Push and hold RAND (preset button 1) until you hear a beep. will appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the magazine in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features you can either listen to all of the files on the compact discs in random order. You can also listen to the files in a single folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder: Quickly push and release RAND (preset button 1). will appear on the display.

To randomly play all of the files on the compact disc: Push and hold RAND (preset button 1) until you hear a beep. will appear on the display and the player will play all of the files on the disc in random order. To turn off the random playback feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat featuresyou can either replay a disc track or a whole com- pact disc.

Repeating a track: Quickly push and release RPT (preset button 2) while the track is playing. will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only

Repeating a disc: Push and hold RPT (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. will ap- pear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the first track on the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat featuresYou can repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file: Quickly push and release RPT (preset button 2) while the file is playing. will appear on the display. When the file ends, it will repeat automatically. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the re- peat feature.

Repeating a folder: Push and hold RPT (preset button 2) until you hear a beep. will ap- pear on the display. The player will repeat all of the files in the folder. When the last file in the folder ends, the folder will re- peat from the beginning. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

208

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on a band or scan only the preset stations for that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the SCAN button until you hear a beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the SCAN but- ton. The radio will find the next station up the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again to the next station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan featuresyou can ei- ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or scan the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc: Quickly push and release the SCAN but- ton. SCAN will appear on the display and the player will scan all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

With compact disc changer only

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine: Push the SCAN button until you hear a beep. will appear on the dis- play and the player will scan the first track on the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player has scanned all the discs, it will stop scan- ning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan featuresyou can ei- ther scan the files in a folder on a specif- ic disc or scan the first file of all the folder.

Scanning the files on a folder: Quickly push and release SCAN. SCAN will appear on the display and the player will scan all the files in the folder you are listening to. To select a file, push the SCAN again. After all the tracks on the disc have been scanned in one pass, nor- mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders: Push SCAN until you hear a beep. will appear on the display and the player will scan the first file of the next folder. To select a folder, push the SCAN again. After all the folders have been scanned in one pass, normal play resumes.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

209

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up/ down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and plays the next station up or down the station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and release or side of the SEEK/ TRACK button. Do this again to find the station after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a different track.

Push or side of the SEEK/ TRACK button until the number of the track you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the begin- ning of the current track, quickly push the down side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file: Push either side of the TRACK several times until the file you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current file, push the side of the button one time, quickly.

To fast forward or reverse the disc: If you want to fast forward or reverse the disc, push and hold it until you hear a beep. When you release the button, the player will resume playing.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is re- ceived. ST appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prev- ent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono recep- tion.

TEXT

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display for the compact disc that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the TEXT button while the com- pact disc is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to disc title to track title, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact disc that does not contain text data is playing, NO TITLE will appear on the display.

If the entire disc or track title does not appear on the display, push and hold the button until you hear a beep. The rest of the title will appear.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display for the MP3/WMA file that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the TEXT button while the MP3/WMA file is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to folder name to file name to album title to track title to artist name, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an MP3/WMA file that does not contain text data is playing, NO TITLE will appear on the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed, push and hold it until you hear a beep. The rest of the text data will appear.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

210

TUNEFILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the knob clockwise to step up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to file down.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

211

Details of specific buttons, controls and features are described in the alphabetical list that follows.

Type 2

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

212

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in the desired station. (See TUNEFILE or SEEK/TRACK.) Push and hold down the button until you hear a beepthis will set the station to the button. The preset but- ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button for the station you want. The preset but- ton number and station frequency will ap- pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and two FM stations for each button. (The display will show AM, FM1 or FM2 when you push AMSAT, FM1 or FM2 button.)

XM satellite radio

These buttons are used to preset and tune in radio channels.

To preset a channel to a button: Tune in the desired channel. (See TUNEFILE or SEEK/TRACK.) Push and hold down the button until you hear a beepthis will set the channel to the button. The preset but- ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but- ton for the channel you want. The preset button number and channel number will appear on the display.

This radio can store three XM channels for each button. (The display will show SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 when you push AMSAT button.) : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or all compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push and release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push (preset button 3) or (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to eject is displayed. Push and release the eject but- ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press and hold the eject button until you hear a beep. The last compact disc played before pushing the button will be ejected first. If the ejected disc is not removed for a long time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Reverse/Fastforward button)

Push and hold (preset button 6) or

(preset button 5) to fastforward or reverse within a compact disc. When you release the button, the compact disc play- er will resume playing.

AMSAT (AM band and XM satellite ra- dio)

Push the AMSAT button to turn on the radio and select the AM or XM band. AM, SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 will ap- pear on the display.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.

ANTENNA:

The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely.

A shortcircuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

213

UPDATING:

You have not subscribed to the XM satellite radio. The radio is being up- dated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM satellite radio for sub- scription information. When a contact is canceled, you can choose the CH000 and all freetoair channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 sec- onds until the radio returns to the pre- vious channel or CH001. If it does not change automatically, select anoth- er channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM satel- lite radio.

NO SIGNAL: The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

LOADING: The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information.

OFF AIR: The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

: The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or CH001. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

The XM Listener Care Center is also available on the phone, please call (800) 8529696 during the following hours: MondaySaturday: 7 a.m.1 a.m. Sunday: 12 p.m.12 a.m. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

AUDIO CONT (Tone and sound balance controls)

Each time you push the AUDIO CONT knob, the mode changes. To adjust the tone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts lowpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts highpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. The display ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. The display ranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can be turned on by turning the knob. In addi- tion, turning the knob allows you to select from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and tone settings. The ASL system automati- cally adjusts volume and tone in accor- dance with the driving speed. This helps ensure an optimal listening experience even if noise levels rise while driving.

DISCAUX (Compact disc)

Push the DISCAUX button to play a compact disc.

When the audio system is set to compact disc operation, the display shows the track, or track and disc number currently being played.

Vehicles with AUX adapter

To switch between CD, DVD, and AUX (external device) modes, press the DISCAUX button. The AUX mode is only available when AUX adapter is connected to the system. When the AUX adapter is in use, AUX will appear on the display.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

214

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- tem will display following error messages.

WAIT: The compact disc player unit may be too hot. Allow the player to cool down.

ERROR 1: The disc may be dirty, dam- aged or inserted incorrectly (upside down). Clean the disc and reinsert it.

NO DISC: The compact disc changer of the separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

ERROR 3: There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.

ERROR 4: Overcurrent. Ask your Toyota dealer to inspect.

CD OPEN: The compact disc changer lid of the separate unit is open. Close the compact disc changer lid.

If NO MUSIC appears on the display, it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA data has been inserted. Remove the disc from the player and insert an MP3/WMA data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

DISC

Use these buttons to select a disc you want to listen to.

Push (preset button 3) or (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the FM1 or FM2 button to turn on the radio and select the FM band. FM1 or FM2 will appear on the display. This system allows you to set twelve FM sta- tions, two for each of the preset button.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder: Push either side of the FOLDER several times until the number of the folder you want to listen to appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the current folder: Push and hold the side of the button until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio data (CDDA) and MP3/WMA files, audio data (CDDA) is played.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact discs in the compact disc player. This player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly push and release the button, then insert a compact disc. After the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter will close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push and hold the button (until you hear a beep when the audio system is on), then insert the first compact disc. After the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will close. After a few seconds, the shutter will auto- matically open again so the next disc can be inserted. The same process can be applied for loading the rest of the discs. If the player is full of discs, DISC FULL will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter will close after 15 seconds.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

215

PWRVOL (Power and Volume)

Push PWRVOL to turn the audio system on and off. Turn PWRVOL to adjust the volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random featuresyou can either listen to the tracks on one compact disc in random order, or listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random order: Quickly push and release RAND (preset button 1). will appear on the display and the player will perform the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order. To turn off the random fea- ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in random order: Push and hold RAND (preset button 1) until you hear a beep. will appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the magazine in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features you can either listen to all of the files on the compact discs in random order. You can also listen to the files in a single folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder: Quickly push and release RAND (preset

button 1). will appear on the display.

To randomly play all of the files on the compact disc: Push and hold RAND (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. will appear on the display and the player will play all of the files on the disc in random order. To turn off the random playback feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat featuresyou can either replay a disc track or a whole com- pact disc.

Repeating a track: Quickly push and release RPT (preset button 2) while the track is playing. will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

Repeating a disc: Push and hold RPT (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. will ap- pear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the first track on the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

216

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat featuresYou can repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file: Quickly push and release RPT (preset button 2) while the file is playing. will appear on the display. When the file ends, it will repeat automatically. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the re- peat feature.

Repeating a folder: Push and hold RPT (preset button 2) until you hear a beep. will ap- pear on the display. The player will repeat all of the files in the folder. When the last file in the folder ends, the folder will re- peat from the beginning. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on a band or scan only the preset stations for that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the SCAN button until you hear a beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the SCAN but- ton. The radio will find the next station up the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again to the next station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

XM satellite radio

You can either scan the currently selected channel category or scan only the preset channels for that band.

To scan the preset channels: Push and hold the SCAN button until you hear a beep. SCAN appears on the display. The radio will tune in the next preset channel up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then move to the next preset channel. To stop scanning, push this button again.

To scan the currently selected channel category: Quickly push and release the SCAN but- ton. SCAN appears on the display. The radio will find the next channel in the same channel category up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again. To stop scanning, push this button again. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

217

Compact disc player

There are two scan featuresyou can ei- ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or scan the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc: Quickly push and release the SCAN but- ton. SCAN will appear on the display and the player will scan all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine: Push the SCAN button until you hear a

beep. will appear on the dis- play and the player will scan the first track on the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player has scanned all the discs, it will stop scan- ning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan featuresyou can ei- ther scan the files in a folder on a specif- ic disc or scan the first file of all the folder.

Scanning the files on a folder: Quickly push and release SCAN. SCAN will appear on the display and the player will scan all the files in the folder you are listening to. To select a file, push the SCAN again. After all the tracks on the disc have been scanned in one pass, nor- mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders: Push SCAN until you hear a beep. will appear on the display and the player will scan the first file of the next folder. To select a folder, push the SCAN again. After all the folders have been scanned in one pass, normal play resumes.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up/ down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and plays the next station up or down the station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and release or side of the SEEK/ TRACK button. Do this again to find the station after that.

XM satellite radio

To select the next channel within the cur- rent channel category, push the or side of the SEEK/TRACK button. Repeat until a desired channel is found. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

218

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a different track.

Push or side of the SEEK/ TRACK button until the number of the track you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the begin- ning of the current track, quickly push the down side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file: Push either side of the TRACK several times until the file you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current file, push the side of the button one time, quickly.

To fast forward or reverse the disc: If you want to fast forward or reverse the disc, push and hold it until you hear a beep. When you release the button, the player will resume playing.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is re- ceived. ST appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prev- ent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono recep- tion.

TEXT

XM satellite radio1

When you push the TEXT button, the display changes as follows: CH NAME TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE) NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA- TURE) CH NUMBER CH NAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be displayed. (Some information will not be fully displayed.)

The message display will be canceled if any button that affects the display is pushed.

If there is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time, will appear on the display.

This XM tuner supports Audio Services (Music and Talk) of only XM satellite radio and Text Information2 linked to the re- spective audio services. 1: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

2: Text Information includes, Channel Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and Category Name.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display for the compact disc that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the TEXT button while the com- pact disc is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to disc title to track title, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact disc that does not contain text data is playing, NO TITLE will appear on the display.

If the entire disc or track title does not appear on the display, push and hold the button until you hear a beep. The rest of the title will appear.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

219

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display for the MP3/WMA file that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the TEXT button while the MP3/WMA file is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to folder name to file name to album title to track title to artist name, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an MP3/WMA file that does not contain text data is playing, NO TITLE will appear on the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed, push and hold it until you hear a beep. The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNEFILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the knob clockwise to step up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

XM satellite radio

Turn the TUNEFILE knob clockwise to step up the channel. Turn the knob coun- terclockwise to step down the channel. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to file down.

TYPE

XM satellite radio

When you push the or side of the TYPE button while receiving a XM channel, the current channel category ap- pears on the display.

When the channel category appears, push either or side of the TYPE but- ton to switch to the next or previous cate- gory. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

220

Details of specific buttons, controls and features are described in the alphabetical list that follows.

Type 3

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

221

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in the desired station. (See TUNEFILE or SEEK/TRACK.) Push and hold down the button until you hear a beepthis will set the station to the button. The preset but- ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button for the station you want. The preset but- ton number and station frequency will ap- pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and two FM stations for each button. (The display will show AM, FM1 or FM2 when you push AMSAT or FM button.)

XM satellite radio

These buttons are used to preset and tune in radio channels.

To preset a channel to a button: Tune in the desired channel. (See TUNEFILE or SEEK/TRACK.) Push and hold down the button until you hear a beepthis will set the channel to the button. The preset but- ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but- ton for the channel you want. The preset button number and channel number will appear on the display.

This radio can store three XM channels for each button. (The display will show SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 when you push AMSAT button.) : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or all compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push and release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push (preset button 3) or (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to eject is displayed. Push and release the eject but- ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press and hold the eject button until you hear a beep. The last compact disc played before pushing the button will be ejected first. If the ejected disc is not removed for a long time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Reverse/Fastforward button)

Push and hold (preset button 6) or

(preset button 5) to fastforward or reverse within a compact disc. When you release the button, the compact disc play- er will resume playing.

AMSAT (AM band and XM satellite ra- dio)

Push the AMSAT button to turn on the radio and select the AM or XM band. AM, SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 will ap- pear on the display.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.

ANTENNA:

The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely.

A shortcircuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

222

UPDATING:

You have not subscribed to the XM satellite radio. The radio is being up- dated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM satellite radio for sub- scription information. When a contact is canceled, you can choose the CH000 and all freetoair channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 sec- onds until the radio returns to the pre- vious channel or CH001. If it does not change automatically, select anoth- er channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM satel- lite radio.

NO SIGNAL: The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

LOADING: The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information.

OFF AIR: The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

: The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or CH001. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

The XM Listener Care Center is also available on the phone, please call (800) 8529696 during the following hours: MondaySaturday: 7 a.m.1 a.m. Sunday: 12 p.m.12 a.m. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal- ance controls)

Each time you push the AUDIO CONTROL knob, the mode changes. To adjust the tone and balance or turn the rear seat entertainment system on/off, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts lowpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts midpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts highpitched tones. The dis- play ranges from 5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. The display ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. The display ranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Automatic Sound Le- velizer (ASL) ON/OFF

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can be turned on by turning the knob. The ASL system automatically adjusts volume and tone in accordance with ambient noise levels. This helps ensure an optimal lis- tening experience even when road, wind or other ambient noise levels rise.

RSE: Vehicles with a rear seat entertain- ment systemSee Rear seat entertain- ment system on page 231 in this Section.

DISCAUX (Compact disc)

Push the DISCAUX button to play a compact disc.

When the audio system is set to compact disc operation, the display shows the track, or track and disc number currently being played.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

223

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys- tem

The DISCAUX button may also be used to operate the DVD player when a disc is in the DVD player. Pressing the DISCAUX button allows you to switch between the CD player and the DVD play- er. When the DVD player is in operation, RSE DVD appears on the display.

Vehicles with AUX adapter

To switch between CD, DVD, and AUX (external device) modes, press the DISCAUX button. The AUX mode is only available when AUX adapter is connected to the system. When the AUX adapter is in use, AUX will appear on the display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- tem will display following error messages.

WAIT: The compact disc player unit may be too hot. Allow the player to cool down.

ERROR 1: The disc may be dirty, dam- aged or inserted incorrectly (upside down). Clean the disc and reinsert it.

NO DISC: The compact disc changer of the separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

ERROR 3: There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.

ERROR 4: Overcurrent. Ask your Toyota dealer to inspect.

CD OPEN: The compact disc changer lid of the separate unit is open. Close the compact disc changer lid.

If NO MUSIC appears on the display, it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA data has been inserted. Remove the disc from the player and insert an MP3/WMA data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

DISC

Use these buttons to select a disc you want to listen to.

Push (preset button 3) or (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to listen appears on the display.

FM

Push the FM button to turn on the radio and select the FM band. FM1 or FM2 will appear on the display. This system allows you to set twelve FM stations, two for each of the preset buttons.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder: Push either side of the FOLDER several times until the number of the folder you want to listen to appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the current folder: Push and hold the side of the button until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio data (CDDA) and MP3/WMA files, audio data (CDDA) is played.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact discs in the compact disc player. This player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly push and release the button, then insert a compact disc. After the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter will close after 15 seconds.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

224

To load multiple compact discs, push and hold the button (until you hear a beep when the audio system is on), then insert the first compact disc. After the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will close. After a few seconds, the shutter will auto- matically open again so the next disc can be inserted. The same process can be applied for loading the rest of the discs. If the player is full of discs, DISC FULL will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter will close after 15 seconds.

PWRVOL (Power and Volume)

Push PWRVOL to turn the audio system on and off. Turn PWRVOL to adjust the volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random featuresyou can either listen to the tracks on one compact disc in random order, or listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random order: Quickly push and release RAND (preset

button 1). will appear on the display and the player will perform the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order. To turn off the random fea- ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in random order: Push and hold RAND (preset button 1) until you hear a beep. will appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the magazine in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features you can either listen to all of the files on the compact discs in random order. You can also listen to the files in a single folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder: Quickly push and release RAND (preset

button 1). will appear on the display.

To randomly play all of the files on the compact disc: Push and hold RAND (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. will appear on the display and the player will play all of the files on the disc in random order. To turn off the random playback feature, push this button again.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

225

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat featuresyou can either replay a disc track or a whole com- pact disc.

Repeating a track: Quickly push and release RPT (preset button 2) while the track is playing. will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

Repeating a disc: Push and hold RPT (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. will ap- pear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the first track on the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat featuresYou can repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file: Quickly push and release RPT (preset button 2) while the file is playing. will appear on the display. When the file ends, it will repeat automatically. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the re- peat feature.

Repeating a folder: Push and hold RPT (preset button 2) until you hear a beep. will ap- pear on the display. The player will repeat all of the files in the folder. When the last file in the folder ends, the folder will re- peat from the beginning. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on a band or scan only the preset stations for that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the SCAN button until you hear a beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the SCAN but- ton. The radio will find the next station up the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again to the next station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

226

XM satellite radio

You can either scan the currently selected channel category or scan only the preset channels for that band.

To scan the preset channels: Push and hold the SCAN button until you hear a beep. SCAN appears on the display. The radio will tune in the next preset channel up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then move to the next preset channel. To stop scanning, push this button again.

To scan the currently selected channel category: Quickly push and release the SCAN but- ton. SCAN appears on the display. The radio will find the next channel in the same channel category up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again. To stop scanning, push this button again. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

Compact disc player

There are two scan featuresyou can ei- ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or scan the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc: Quickly push and release the SCAN but- ton. SCAN will appear on the display and the player will scan all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine: Push the SCAN button until you hear a

beep. will appear on the dis- play and the player will scan the first track on the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player has scanned all the discs, it will stop scan- ning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan featuresyou can ei- ther scan the files in a folder on a specif- ic disc or scan the first file of all the folder.

Scanning the files on a folder: Quickly push and release SCAN. SCAN will appear on the display and the player will scan all the files in the folder you are listening to. To select a file, push the SCAN again. After all the tracks on the disc have been scanned in one pass, nor- mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders: Push SCAN until you hear a beep. will appear on the display and the player will scan the first file of the next folder. To select a folder, push the SCAN again. After all the folders have been scanned in one pass, normal play resumes.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

227

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up/ down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and plays the next station up or down the station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and release or side of the SEEK/ TRACK button. Do this again to find the station after that.

XM satellite radio

To select the next channel within the cur- rent channel category, push the or side of the SEEK/TRACK button. Repeat until a desired channel is found. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a different track.

Push or side of the SEEK/ TRACK button until the number of the track you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the begin- ning of the current track, quickly push the down side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file: Push either side of the TRACK several times until the file you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current file, push the side of the button one time, quickly.

To fast forward or reverse the disc: If you want to fast forward or reverse the disc, push and hold it until you hear a beep. When you release the button, the player will resume playing.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys- tem

While the DVD player is in operation, the chapter or track can be changed by push- ing the or side of the SEEKTRACK button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is re- ceived. ST appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prev- ent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono recep- tion.

TEXT

Radio

XM satellite radio1

When you push the TEXT button, the display changes as follows: CH NAME TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE) NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA- TURE) CH NUMBER CH NAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be displayed. (Some information will not be fully displayed.)

The message display will be canceled if any button that affects the display is pushed.

If there is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time, will appear on the display.

This XM tuner supports Audio Services (Music and Talk) of only XM satellite radio and Text Information2 linked to the re- spective audio services. 1: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

2: Text Information includes, Channel Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and Category Name.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

228

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display for the compact disc that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the TEXT button while the com- pact disc is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to disc title to track title, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact disc that does not contain text data is playing, NO TITLE will appear on the display.

If the entire disc or track title does not appear on the display, push and hold the button until you hear a beep. The rest of the title will appear.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display for the MP3/WMA file that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the TEXT button while the MP3/WMA file is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to folder name to file name to album title to track title to artist name, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an MP3/WMA file that does not contain text data is playing, NO TITLE will appear on the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed, push and hold it until you hear a beep. The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNEFILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the knob clockwise to step up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

XM satellite radio

Turn the TUNEFILE knob clockwise to step up the channel. Turn the knob coun- terclockwise to step down the channel. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to file down.

TYPE

XM satellite radio

When you push the or side of the TYPE button while receiving a XM channel, the current channel category ap- pears on the display.

When the channel category appears, push either or side of the TYPE but- ton to switch to the next or previous cate- gory. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

229

Some parts of the audio system can be adjusted using the switches on the steer- ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls, and features are described below.

1. Volume control switches

2. switch

3. MODE switch

1. Volume control switches

Push the + side to increase the volume. The volume continues to increase while the switch is being pushed.

Push the side to decrease the volume. The volume continues to decrease while the switch is being pushed.

2. switch

Radio

This switch has the following features

To select a preset station: Quickly push and release the or side of the switch. Do this again to select the next preset station.

To seek a station: Push and hold the or side of the switch until you hear a beep. Do this again to find the next station. If you push the switch on either side during the seek mode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, push and hold the switch even after you hear a beep. When you release the switch, the radio will begin seeking up or down for a station. Do this again to find the next station.

XM satellite radio

To select a preset channel, push the or side of the switch. Repeat until a desired channel is found. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to a different track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the or side of the switch until the track you want to listen to is set. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, push the side of the switch once, quickly.

With compact disc changer only

Push and hold the or side of the switch until the disc you want to listen to is set.

MP3/WMA player

Use this switch to select a desired file or disc.

To select a desired file: Quickly push and release the or side of the switch until the file you want to listen to is set. If you want to return to the beginning of the current file, push the side of the switch once, quickly.

Audio remote controls (steering switches)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

230

To select a desired disc: Push and hold the or side of the switch until the disc you want to listen to is set.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys- tem

While the DVD player is in operation, the chapter or track can be changed by push- ing the or side of the switch.

3. MODE switch

Push the MODE switch to select an au- dio mode. Each push changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to use.

To turn the audio system on, push the MODE switch.

To turn the audio system off, push and hold the MODE switch until the system turns off.

An AUX adapter is installed in the rear console box.

By inserting a mini plug into the AUX adapter, you can listen to music from a portable audio device through the vehicles speaker system.

To use the AUX adapter, switch to the AUX mode (external device mode) by pressing the DISCAUX button. When the AUX adapter is in use, AUX will appear on the display. To adjust the volume, turn the PWRVOL knob.

When using a portable audio device con- nected to the power outlet or cigarette lighter, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

If you install an audio system other than a genuine audio system, you will not be able to use the AUX adapter.

AUX adapter

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

231

The rear seat entertainment system con- sists of the following components.

1. Front audio system

2. DVD player

3. Rear seat entertainment system display

4. Rear seat entertainment system controller

5. A/V input adapter

6. Power outlet (115 VAC)

7. Power outlet main switch

Rear seat entertainment system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

232

The rear seat entertainment system is de- signed for the rear passengers to enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system can be operated when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

The rear passengers can enjoy DVD vid- eo, audio CD, video CD, CD text, dtsCD and MP3.

The rear seat entertainment system can play DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD text, dtsCD or MP3 only when a disc is loaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound when your personal audio system is connected to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer to the manufacturers instructions.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with a wireless headphone. The wireless headphone can be used within rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the headphone will mute. For details, refer to the manufacturers instructions.

With some wireless headphone generally available in the market, it may be difficult to catch sound properly. Toyota recom- mends the use of Toyota genuine wireless headphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphone at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not operate a motor vehicle while using headphones. Doing so may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

With DVD player:

Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume lev- el that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in- creased, before you turn on the headphone.

To open the display, push the lock release button.

Display

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

233

Pull the display down to an easily view- able angle (between 90 and 125)

NOTICE

The screen should be cleaned with a dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed by hand or wiped with a hard cloth, the surface of the screen may be scratched.

To close, push the display up until you hear a click.

The illumination of the screen is automati- cally turned off when the display is closed. However, the rear seat entertain- ment system is not turned off.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, close the display when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Benzene or alkaline solutions may damage the coated surface of the screen.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not turn on the rear seat entertainment system longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

234

The rear seat entertainment system can be operated with the rear seat entertain- ment system controller and buttons on the DVD player unit. The system cannot be operated by touching the switches on the screen directly.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the controller. It may cause an accident, fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from direct sunlight, high heat and high humidity. These conditions could cause the case to deform or the battery to ex- plode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER (for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control- ler with an insulating sheet, which pre- vents the battery from being dis- charged. Before using the controller, remove the insulating sheet according to the following procedure.

1. Remove the cover of the controller as shown.

Rear seat entertainment system controller

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

235

2. Remove the insulating sheet.

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat entertainment sys- tem controller, direct the signal output portion of the controller to the signal reception portion of the rear seat enter- tainment system display.

The controller does not operate properly when the signal reception portion of the display is exposed to direct sunlight. Block the display from direct sunlight.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop while driving, stow the controller in the console box or front seat side table when it is not in use.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

236

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise the controller may be damaged.

Do not drop or strongly knock the controller against hard objects.

Do not sit on or place heavy ob- jects on the controller.

Do not leave the controller exposed to high temperatures (such as on the instrument panel) for a long time.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

237

1. DVD button

This button turns on the DVD mode.

2. VIDEO button

This button causes the display to use the video signal from an external video device.

3. OFF button

This button turns off the rear seat en- tertainment system.

4. Joystick

This joystick selects a control switch, mode switch on the screen or the menu for the disc.

5. ENT button

This button inputs the selected switch or the selected menu for the disc.

6. FOLDER button

This button selects a desired folder.

7. FOLDER button

This button selects a desired folder.

8. button

This button fast forwards a screen when the DVD player is operated.

Control buttons Controller

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

238

9. button

This button stops a screen when the DVD player is operated.

10. SET UP button

This button indicates the initial set up screen when the DVD player is oper- ated.

11. MENU button

This button indicates the menu screen for DVD video when the DVD player is operated.

12. AUDIO button

This button indicates the changing au- dio screen when the DVD player is operated.

13. SUB TITLE button

This button indicates the changing sub- title screen when the DVD player is operated.

14. DISPLAY button

This button adjusts the color, tone, contrast and brightness of the screen.

15. SIZE button

This button changes the display mode when the DVD player is operated.

16. ANGLE button

This button selects the angle of the screen when the DVD player is oper- ated.

17. SEARCH button

This button indicates the title search screen when the DVD player is oper- ated.

18. TOP MENU button

This button indicates the title selection screen for DVD video when the DVD player is operated.

19. button

This button reverse a screen when the DVD player is operated.

20. button

This button plays or pauses a screen when the DVD player is operated.

21. TRACK/CHAPTER button

This button selects track/chapter.

22. TRACK/CHAPTER button

This button selects track/chapter.

23. OPTION button

This button indicates the control switches on the screen when the DVD player is operated.

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use 3 AA batteries.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre- vent small children from swallowing the removed transmitter battery or components.

NOTICE

When replacing the battery, be care- ful not to lose the components.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery recom- mended by a Toyota dealer.

Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

239

Replace the battery according to the fol- lowing procedure:

1. Remove the cover of the controller as shown.

2. Remove the discharged batteries and put in the new batteries as shown. Install the cover.

NOTICE

Be sure that the positive side and negative side of the controller bat- tery should be faced correctly.

Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause rust.

Do not touch or move any compo- nents inside of the controller, or it may interfere with proper operation.

Be careful not to bend the electrode of the controller battery insertion.

Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the controller operates properly. If the control- ler still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

240

To turn on the system, push the DVD button or VIDEO button.

When the DVD button is pushed, the disc load screen changes to the DVD player operation screen.

When the VIDEO button is pushed, the images and sounds from the personal au- dio machine are output.

The DVD button is effective only when a disc is inserted.

To turn off the system, push the OFF button.

When the front audio system is turned off, the rear audio system and the DVD player will be turned off simultaneously.

The rear seat entertainment system can be switched ON and OFF by pushing the Rr. DISP switch on the front audio sys- tem.

Turning the rear seat entertainment system on and off

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

241

The rear DVD player can be operated through the front audio system.

The audio system controls in the instru- ment panel allow the operation of the rear seat entertainment system by rear seat passengers to be disabled.

Turning on the rear system lock prevents small children from using the remote con- troller or operation panel of the DVD play- er unit to operate the rear seat entertain- ment system during driving.

Turn the audio system on. Push the AUDIO CONTROL knob repeatedly until RSE is displayed. Next, turn the AUDIO CONTROL knob until ON is displayed, and then push the AUDIO CONTROL knob.

Push the INFO button to change the screen to Screen Setting.

Push the ON switch on the Screen Setting screen to turn on the Rear system lock. Then push OK.

Front audio system operation

Rear system lock (with navigation system)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

242

When the rear system lock is on and any button is pushed on the remote controller or the operation panel, the screen shown above is displayed for approximately 6 seconds.

Even when the rear system lock is turned on during play mode, the images and sounds continue without interruption.

The condition of the rear system lock is maintained, even when the ignition switch is turned off.

The DVD player can play audio CDs/ MP3 CDs, DVD video discs, CD texts, dtsCDs and video CDs.

For appropriate discs for this player, see Audio/video system operating hints on page 270 in this Section.

The DVD player works when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

To turn on the DVD player, a disc must be loaded in the player.

To turn off the player, eject the disc.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- tem will display one of the three following error messages.

If DISC CHECK appears on the screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged or it was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

If REGION CODE ERROR appears on the screen: It indicates that the DVD re- gion code is not set properly.

If DVD ERROR appears on the screen: There is a problem inside the player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

INSERTING THE DISC

Insert a disc into the slot with the label side up.

DISC indicator light turns on while the disc is loaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot be played. In this case, DISC CHECK and disc number appear on the screen.

DVD player

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

243

If a disc which is not playable is inserted, DISC CHECK will also appear on the screen. For appropriate discs for this play- er, see Audio/video system operating hints on page 270 in this Section.

The player will play the track or chapter, and it will play from the beginning of the track or chapter again after it reaches the end.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot.

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Your compact disc player needs an adap- tor to play compact disc singles. Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3 in.) in diametersmaller than standard discs.

EJECTING THE DISC

Push the button.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

244

The DVD player can be operated with the controller buttons directly.

1. DVD button

2. SET UP button

3. MENU button

4. AUDIO button

5. SUB TITLE button

6. ANGLE button

7. SIZE button

8. SEARCH button

9. TOP MENU button

10. , , and buttons

The player can also be operated with the switches on the screen.

To operate the switches on the screen, select the switch by the joystick and push the ENT button. You cannot select the switches on the screen by touching them directly.

When the switch is selected by the joys- tick, the outline of the switch changes to blue. Push the ENT button, and the switch will be highlighted in green.

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES ON AND OFF

To turn on the operation switches, push the OPTION button on the controller.

DVD player operation switches

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

245

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Second page (DVD video operation switch)

Top page (video CD)

Second page (video CD)

There are operation switches on the Page 1 and Page 2 screens.

To change the screen, push the Page 1 or Page 2 switch on the screen.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

246

If appears on the screen when you select a switch, it indicates that the switch cannot work.

On the screen

Controller

To turn off the switches on the screen, push the OPTION button on the control- ler once again or push the Hide Buttons on the screen.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

247

DVD player operation NOTE: The playback condition of some DVD video discs may be determined by the DVD video software producer. This DVD player plays discs as the software producer intended. Therefore, some functions may not work properly. Be sure to read the instruction manual for the DVD video disc separately provided. For detailed information about DVD video discs, see DVD video disc information on page 266 in this Section.

Precautions for DVD video discs

When recording on a DVD video, video CD or audio tracks may not record in some cases while the menu is displayed. As audio will not play in this case, verify that the video tracks are playing and then activate playback.

The title/chapter number and playback time display may not appear while playing back certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to em- phasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level available for the DVD, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

248

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THE DISC ON OR OFF

DVD video

To turn on the menu screen for the disc, push the Top Menu or the Menu switch on the screen. You can also turn on the menu screen by pushing the MENU or TOP MENU button on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

You can select the menu for the disc by the joystick and the ENT button on the controller.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

249

OPERATING THE , , AND SWITCHES/BUTTONS

switch/button: Push this switch/but- ton to pause the disc or to cancel the pause and return to normal playing.

switch/button: This switch/button stops a screen when the DVD player is operated.

and switches/buttons: Push and hold the or switch/button to fast forward or reverse. When you re- lease the switch/button, the DVD player will resume playing.

DVD video only

Push the switch/button while paus- ing, the DVD video plays the slowmotion video replay.

SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINED SCREEN

To skip to the predetermined screen, push the Return switch. The DVD player starts playing from the beginning of the predeter- mined screen.

For further details of the predetermined screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

250

SELECTING THE TITLE

To display the searching title screen, push the Search switch on the screen. You can also display the screen by pushing the SEARCH button on the controller.

DVD video

DVD video

Select the title number by using the joystick and push the ENT button to enter the number. The player starts play- ing disc for that title number. The selected title number will appear on the screen.

Push the Back switch to return to the menu screen.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

251

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Push the Sub Title switch on the screen, and then the changing subtitle language screen will appear. You can also display the screen by pushing the SUB TITLE button on the controller.

Each time you push the Sub Title switch, another language stored on the disc is selected.

To turn off the subtitles, push the Hide Buttons switch.

Push the Back switch to return to the previous screen.

The selected subtitle language will appear on the screen.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

252

CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE (DVD video only)

Push the Audio switch on the screen and then the changing audio language screen will appear. You can also display the screen by pushing the AUDIO button on the controller.

DVD video

Each time you push the Audio switch, another language stored on the disc is selected.

To turn off the audio language screen, push the Hide Buttons switch.

Push the Back switch to return to the previous screen.

DVD video

The selected audio language will appear on the screen.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

253

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Push the Angle switch on the screen, and then the changing angle screen will appear. You can also display the screen by pushing the ANGLE button on the controller.

The angle can be selected for discs that are multiangle compatible when the mark appears on the screen. Each time you push the Angle switch, the angle changes. The angle number which you can select will appear on the screen.

To turn off the screen, push the Hide Buttons switch.

Push the Back switch to return to the previous screen.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

254

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Push the Set Up switch on the screen, and then the initial setting screen will ap- pear. You can also display the screen by pushing the SET UP button on the con- troller. You can change the initial setting.

After the setting is done, the player plays from the beginning of the chapter or the track.

Setup Menu screen

There are initial setting switches on the Setup Menu screen.

After you change the initial setting, push the Enter switch. The initial setting switch will be turned off and return to the picture previously.

When the Default switch is pushed, all menus are initialized.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

255

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the Audio Language switch on the Setup Menu and the Select Audio Lang. screen appears.

Select the language you want to hear by pushing the appropriate switch on the screen.

To return to the Setup Menu screen, push the Back switch.

If you cannot find the language you want to hear, push the Others switch. The Enter Audio Lang. Code screen will ap- pear.

To select an audio language, use the joys- tick to enter the appropriate 4digit lan- guage code. For details of the language codes, see the language code list.

If a code which is not on the list is en- tered and the ENT button is pushed, the Incorrect Code screen will appear. Enter the code of the language you want to hear again.

To return to the Select Audio Lang. screen, push the Back switch.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

To display the Select Subtitle Lang. screen, push the Subtitle Language switch on the Setup Menu screen.

Select the language you want to read by pushing the appropriate switch on the screen.

To return to the Setup Menu screen, push the Back switch.

If you cannot find the language you want to read, push the Others switch. The Enter Subtitle Lang. Code screen will appear.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

256

To enter the code of the language you want to read, use the joystick to enter the appropriate 4digit language code. For de- tails about the language codes, see the language code list.

Push the ENT button on the controller. If numbers which are not on the list are entered and the ENT button is pushed, the Incorrect code screen will appear. Enter the language code you want to read again.

To return to the Select Subtitle Lang. screen, push the Back switch on the screen.

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE

To display the Select DVD Lang. screen, push the DVD Language switch on the Setup Menu screen.

Select the language you want to read on the screen.

To return to the Setup Menu screen, push the Back switch.

If you cannot find a language you want to read, push the Others switch. The Enter DVD Lang. Code screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language you want to read, use the joystick to enter the appropriate 4digit language code. For de- tails about the language codes, see the language code list.

Push the ENT button on the controller. If numbers which are not on the list are entered and the ENT button is pushed, the Incorrect code screen will appear. Enter the language code you want to read again.

To return to the Select DVD Lang. screen, push the Back switch on the screen.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

257

TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR OFF

The angle mark can be turned on for discs that are multiangle compatible.

Each time you push the Angle Mark switch on the screen, the angle mark turns on or off alternately.

SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWER RESTRICTIONS

You can restrict the play back screen by setting the viewer restrictions. You can prevent the restriction with a password. Some discs do not supply a restriction.

To set the level of viewer restriction, push the Parental Lock switch on the Setup Menu screen. The Enter Personal Code screen will appear.

Enter the password and push the ENT button. The Select Restriction Level screen will appear.

You cannot change the setting without in- putting the password. When you forget or change the password, push the side of the joystick ten times to initialize the password.

To return to the Setup Menu screen, push the Back switch.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

258

Push a parental level (18). The smaller the level number, the stricter the age limit. Push the Back switch to return to the Setup Menu screen.

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Pushing the SIZE button on the control- ler causes the display modes to change sequentially as follows:

Normal Wide1 Wide2

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Code Language

1001 Japanese

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

259

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 ScotsGaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

260

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Punjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 RhaetoRomance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 SerboCroatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapk

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

261

SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

To select the chapter/track, push the CHAPTER/TRACK button or CHAPTER/TRACK button on the controller until the number of the chapter/track you want to select appears on the screen.

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the DVD but- ton on the controller. The status screen will appear on the screen.

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER (video CD only)

Push the Select Number switch and then the disc menu number search screen will appear. You can also display the screen by pushing the SEARCH button on the controller.

DVD player operation (video CD/audio CD/CD text/MP3)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

262

Enter the disc menu number by using the joystick and push the ENT button. The player starts playing the disc from the entered disc menu number. The entered disc menu number will appear on the screen.

Push the Back switch to return to the menu screen.

OPERATING THE , AND SWITCHES (video CD only)

switch: Push this switch to pause the disc or to cancel the pause and return to normal playing.

and switches: Push this switch to fast forward or reverse. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, release the switch.

Video CD only

Push the switch/button while paus- ing, the DVD video plays the slowmotion video replay.

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video CD only)

Push the Return switch to turn on the menu screen for the disc.

For the operation of the menu screen, see the manual for the video CD.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

263

CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK (video CD only)

Push the Next Menu or Prev. Menu switch while the disc menu is displayed. The next or previous page will appear on the screen.

Push the Next Menu or Prev. Menu switch while the player is playing video. The next or previous track will be searched and played.

CHANGING A MULTIPLEX TRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the Main/Sub switch to change a multiplex transmission. The mode changes from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back to Main/Sub by pushing the Main/Sub switch.

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video CD only)

Push the Set Up switch on the screen and then the initial setting screen will ap- pear. You can also display the screen by pushing the SET UP button on the con- troller. You can change the initial setting. (See CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING on page 254 in this Section for details.)

After the setting is done, the player plays from the beginning of the chapter or the track.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

264

CD Text

CD MP3

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the DVD but- ton on the controller. The control screen will appear on the screen.

CD text only

The disc title and track title will appear on the screen when pushing the DVD but- ton.

Details of the specific switches, controls and features are described below.

1. RPT switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the RPT switch while the track is playing. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the re- peat feature, push this switch again.

2. RAND switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the RAND switch. The player will play the tracks on the disc in ran- dom order. To turn off the random fea- ture, push this switch again.

3. SCAN switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the SCAN switch. The player will scan all the tracks on the disc. To stop scanning, push this switch again. When the player has scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scan- ning.

MP3 only

Folder and file names will appear on the screen when the DVD button is pushed.

The details of the specific switches, con- trols, and features are described below.

1. RPT switch

When the RPT switch is pushed while a track is played, the track file will be played repeatedly until the switch is pushed again. When the switch is pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, all the files in a folder will be played repeat- edly. To turn off repeat play mode, push the switch again.

2. RAND switch

When the RAND switch is pushed, the files in a current folder will be played in random order. When the switch is pushed for at least 0.8 sec- onds, all the files in the disk will be played in random. To turn off random play mode, push the switch again.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

265

3. SCAN switch

When the SCAN switch is pushed, all the files in a current folder will be scanned. Only the first 10 seconds of each file are played sequentially until all the files are scanned. When the switch is pushed for at least 0.8 sec- onds, the first 10 seconds of each ini- tial file of all the folders in the disk will be played sequentially until the entire initial files are scanned. To stop scan- ning, push the switch again.

4. FLD switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial file of the next folder will be played.

5. FLD switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial file of the previous folder will be played.

6. DETAIL switch

When the switch is pushed while a track is played, the detailed file infor- mation of the track will be displayed.

You can adjust the color, contrast, tone and brightness of the screen.

Push the DISPLAY button on the control- ler and the Display screen will appear.

The screen may turn purple to deflect the sunlight. This is not a malfunction.

Operate the joystick up and down to se- lect Brightness, Contrast, Tone, or Color and left and right to make adjustments.

+ or GREEN

or RED

Color Strengthens the green color

Strengthens the red color

Contrast Strengthens the contrast

Weakens the contrast

Tone Strengthens the tone

Weakens the tone

Brightness Brightens Darkens

Screen adjustment

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

266

After adjusting the screen, push the ENT button or DISPLAY button to return to the previous screen.

The audio machine connected to the input terminal adapter can be played in the video mode.

To select the video mode, push the VIDEO button on the controller.

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC col- or TV formats. DVD video discs con- forming to other formats such as PAL or SECAM cannot be used.

Region codes: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating where you can use. If the DVD video disc is not labeled ALL or 1, you cannot use it in this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc in this play- er, REGION CODE ERROR appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not have a region code, in some cases you cannot use it.

Selecting the video mode DVD video disc information

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

267

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSC format of color TV.

Indicates the number of audio tracks.

Indicates the number of language subtitles.

Indicates the number of angles.

Indicates the screen to be selected. Wide screen: 16:9 Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions in which this video disc can be played. ALL: all countries Number: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have adopted MPEG2, one of the world stan- dards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate en- coded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul- tiangle and multilanguage features will also help you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.

Level 27: DVD video discs for children and Grated movies can be played.

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.

Multiangle feature: You can enjoy the same scene at different angles.

Multilanguage feature: You can select the language of the subtitles and audio.

Region codes: Region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you can- not play the disc on the DVD player. For region codes, see page 266.

Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio format DVD. Other decoded type cannot be played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro- grams stored on DVD video discs are di- vided in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title comprises plural chapters.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

268

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the doubleD symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpub- lished works. 19921997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. pat- ents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corpora- tion and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Cor- poration, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

dts is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

The rear entertainment system plays vid- eos and sound when an audiovideo equipment is connected to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer to the manufac- turers instructions.

To use the adapter, open the cover.

The A/V input adapter is composed of 3 input adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapter Red: Audio input adapter White: Audio input adapter

NOTICE

Close the cover when the A/V input adapter is not in use. Inserting a for- eign object other than the appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or short circuit.

A/V input adapter

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

269

After plugging the cord into the adapter, let it go through the gap between the console box and the tray. Use a cord which is thin enough to go through the gap. Close the console box lid.

This power outlet is designed for use as a power supply for the audio device con- nected to the A/V input adapter.

The key must be in the ON position for the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out- let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to use an appliance that requires more than 115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit will activate and cut the power supply. The power supply will restart automatically when you use an appliance that operates within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the main switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn the power outlet off. When the power out- let is not in use, make sure that the main switch is turned off.

Power outlet

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

270

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the ap- propriate plug that fits the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuit.

The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances even if their power consumption is under 115 VAC/100W. These appliances may not operate properly.

Appliances with high initial peak watt- age: cathoderay tube type televisions, compressordriven refrigerators, electric pumps, electric tools, etc.

Measuring devices which process pre- cise data: medical equipment, measur- ing instruments, etc.

Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply: microcomputer controlled electric blankets, touch sen- sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause radio noise.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video system operation:

Be careful not to spill beverages over the system.

Do not put anything other than a compact disc into the slot.

Do not put anything other than a DVD video, video CD, dtsCD or au- dio CD into the DVD player.

The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the sys- tem which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with your radioit is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle.

Audio/video system operating hints

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

271

For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob- lems that probably do not indicate a prob- lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stationsGenerally, the effective range of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmit- ter. They are often accompanied by distor- tion.

MultipathFM signals are reflective, making it possible for two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each oth- er out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception.

Static and flutteringThese occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swappingIf the FM signal you are listening to is interrupted or weak- ened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second station until the origi- nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

FadingAM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphereespecially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio sta- tion, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.

Station interferenceWhen a reflected sig- nal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broad- cast.

StaticAM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electri- cal motors. This results in static.

XM

Alternation or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may in- validate the users right to operate the equipment. : Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal- er for details.

NOTICE

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim- its are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer- ence in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu- nications. However, there is no guar- antee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

272

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television re- ception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an out- let on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experi- enced radio/TV technician for help.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS

Extremely high temperatures can keep your compact disc player and DVD player from working. On hot days, use the air conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you use the players.

Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your compact disc player and DVD player skip.

If moisture gets into your compact disc player and DVD player, the players may not play even though they appear to be working. Remove the disc from the player and wait until it dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players and DVD play- ers use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation ex- posure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the players correctly.

Compact disc player

Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your compact disc player.

SACD dtsCD Copyprotected CD CDR (CDRecordable) CDRW (CDRewritable) CDROM

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

273

Audio CDs

DVD video discs

Video CDs

DVD player

Use only discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your DVD player.

SACD Copyprotected CD CDR (CDRecordable) CDRW (CDRewritable) CDROM DVDR DVD+R DVD+RW DVDRW DVDROM DVDRAM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

274

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transpar- ent/translucent, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the il- lustrations. The use of such discs may damage the player or changer, or it may be impossible to eject the disc.

Correct Wrong

Handle the discs carefully, especially when you are inserting them. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side.

Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a chapter or track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)

Remove discs from the compact disc player when you are not playing them. Store them in their plastic cases away from moisture, heat, and direct sun- light.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

275

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it with another soft, lintfree cloth. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or antistatic device.

MP3/WMA FILES

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) are audio com- pression standards.

The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 and WMA files on CDROM, CDR and CDRW discs.

The unit can play disc recordings com- patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system.

When naming an MP3 or WMA file, add the appropriate file extension (.mp3 or .wma).

The MP3/WMA player plays back files with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3 or WMA files. To prevent noise and playback errors, use the appropri- ate file extensions.

Multisession compatible CDs can also be played.

MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver.1.0, Ver.1.1, Ver.2.2, and Ver.2.3 formats. The unit cannot display disc title, track title and artist name in other formats.

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tags carry information such as track title, artist name.

The emphasis function is available only when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The system can play MP3 files with sampling fre- quencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz. However, the emphasis function is not available for files recorded at these fre- quencies.)

The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In order to achieve a reasonable level of sound quality, discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are recommended.

Playable bit rates MP3 files: MPEG1 LAYER364 to 320 kbps MPEG2 LSF LAYER364 to 160 kbps WMA files: Ver7, 8 CBR48 to 192 kbps Ver9 CBR48 to 320 kbps

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

276

The MP3/WMA player does not play back MP3/WMA files from discs record- er using packet write data transfer (UDF format). Discs should be re- corded using premastering software rather than packetwrite software.

M3u playlists are not compatible with the audio player.

MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not compatible with the au- dio player.

The MP3 player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

When playing back files recorded as VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fastforward or reverse operations are used.

It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA files.

MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 lev- els deep can be played. However, the start of playback may be delayed when using discs containing numerous levels of folders. For this reason, we recom- mend creating discs with no more than two levels of folders.

It is possible to play up to 192 folders or 255 files on one disc.

001.mp3 002.wma

Folder 1 003.mp3

Folder 2 004.wma 005.mp3

Folder 3 006.mp3

The play order of the compact disc with the structure shown on the left is as follows:

The order changes depending on the PC and MP3/WMA encoding software you use.

CDR and CDRW discs

CDR/CDRW discs that have not been subject to the finalizing process (a process that allows discs to be played on a conventional CD player) cannot be played.

It may not be possible to play CD R/CDRW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of the unit.

It may not be possible to play discs recorded on a personal computer de- pending on the application settings and the environment. Record with the cor- rect format. (For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the applications.)

CDR/CDRW discs may be damaged by direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage condi- tions. The unit may be unable to play some damaged discs.

Titles and other text information re- corded on CDR/CDRW disc may not be displayed by the MP3/WMA player (in the case of audio data [CDDA]).

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

277

The MP3/WMA player conforms to the track skip function of the CDR/CD RW disc.

If you insert a CDRW disc into the MP3/WMA player, playback will begin more slowly than with a conventional CD or CDR disc.

Read the precautions accompanying the CDR/CDRW discs before use.

Recordings on CDR/CDRW cannot be played using the DDCD (Double Density CD) system.

TERMS

Packet write

This is a general term that describes the process of writing data ondemand to CDR, etc., in the same way that data is written to floppy or hard discs.

Bit rate

Bit rate refers to data volume per second, or bps units (bits per second). The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. The higher the rate, the better the sound.

Multisession

Multisession is a recording method that allows additional data to be recorded later. When recording data on a CDROM, CDR or CDRW, etc., all data from be- ginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multisession is a method of recording more than 2 sessions on one disc.

CDDA

CDDA is an abbreviation for Compact Disc Digital Audio. It refers to the uncom- pressed format of regular CDs.

ID3 Tag

This is a method of embedding trackre- lated information in an MP3 file. This em- bedded information can include the track title, the artists name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, com- ments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to the number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back.

WMA Tag

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tags carry information such as track title, artist name.

ISO 9660 format

This is the international standard for the formatting of CDROM folders and files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are two levels of regulations.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (8 charac- ter file names, with a 3 character file extension. File names must be composed of onebyte capital letters and numbers. The _ symbol may also be included.)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

278

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 charac- ters (including the separation mark . and file extension). Each folder must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

Extended formats

Joliet:

File names can include up to 64 charac- ters.

Romeo:

File names can include up to 128 charac- ters.

m3u

Playlists created using WINAMP software have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3

MP3 is an audio compression standard determined by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standard Organiza- tion). MP3 compresses audio data to about 1/10 the size of that on convention- al discs.

WMA

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio compression format developed by Micro- soft. It compresses files into a size small- er than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver7, 8, and 9.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

279

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Air conditioning system Controls 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel and rear vents 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning filter 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 9

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

280

1. Fan speed selector

2. AUTO button

3. Temperature selector

4. A/C button

5. Air flow selector

6. Air intake selector

7. OFF button

Controls (without DUAL button)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

281

AUTO button

For automatic operation of the air condi- tioning, push the AUTO button. An indi- cator light will illuminate to show that the automatic operation mode has been se- lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and onoff of the air conditioning according to the tem- perature.

When you push the AUTO button with the air intake mode at FRESH, internal circulation may be applied for maximum cooling.

You may use manual controls if you want to select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad- just the fan speed and push it. An indica- tor light will illuminate to show which fan speed mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have to adjust the fan speed unless you desire another fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, push the UP side, to decrease it, push the DOWN side.

LO appears when you adjust to maxi- mum cooling, and HI appears when you adjust to maximum warming.

OFF button

Push the OFF button to turn off the air conditioning system.

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select the vents used for air flow. An indicator light will illuminate to show which air flow mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have to select the air flow unless you desire another air flow mode.

1. PanelAir flows from the instrument panel vents and rear vents.

2. BilevelAir flows from both the floor vents, the instrument panel vents and rear vents.

3. FloorAir flows mainly from the floor vents.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

282

4. Floor/WindshieldAir flows mainly from the floor vents and windshield vents and fan speed may increase in order to clean up the front view.

This button allows the air intake to select FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in- take selector button once again.

5. WindshieldAir flows mainly from the windshield vents and fan speed may increase in order to clean up the front view.

Pressing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to select FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. It is not possible to return to RECIR- CULATE in this mode.

For details about air flow selector settings, see Air flow selector settings described below.

Air intake selector

Push the button to select the air source. An indicator light will illuminate to show which the air source is being selected.

1. RecirculateRecirculates the air inside the vehicle.

2. FreshDraws outside air into the sys- tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode may change automati- cally to FRESH depending on the condi- tion of the air conditioning system.

For example, when the ambient tempera- ture is low, the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH. This is not a malfunction.

If the ambient temperature is low when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the air intake mode is always set to FRESH even though the previous mode was RECIRCULATE.

A/C button

To turn on the air conditioning, push the A/C button. The A/C button indicator will come on. To turn the air conditioning off, push the button again.

If the A/C button indicator flashes, there is a problem in the air conditioning system and the air conditioning automatically shuts off. If this happens, take your ve- hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

283

1. Fan speed selector

2. Temperature selector (at the independent mode: for driver) (at the linked mode: for driver and front passenger)

3. AUTO button

4. DUAL button

5. Temperature selector (for front passenger)

6. Air flow selector

7. Air intake selector

8. A/C button

9. OFF button

Controls (with DUAL button)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

284

AUTO button

For automatic operation of the air condi- tioning, push the AUTO button. An indi- cator light will illuminate to show that the automatic operation mode has been se- lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and onoff of the air conditioning according to the tem- perature.

When you push the AUTO button with the air intake mode at FRESH, internal circulation may be applied for maximum cooling.

You may use manual controls if you want to select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad- just the fan speed and push it. An indica- tor light will illuminate to show which fan speed mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have to adjust the fan speed unless you desire another fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, push the side, to decrease it, push the side.

LO appears when you adjust to maxi- mum cooling, and HI appears when you adjust to maximum warming.

DUAL button

This button is used to set the tempera- tures independently for the drivers seat and front passenger seat.

Pushing the button changes the mode from independent and linked.

Independent mode: Temperatures can be set independently for the drivers seat and front passengers seat. An indicator light will illuminated to show that the indepen- dent mode has been selected.

Linked mode: The same temperature is set for the drivers seat and front passen- gers seat.

When the temperature for the front pas- sengers seat is changed in linked mode, the mode is changed automatically to in- dependent mode.

OFF button

Push the OFF button to turn off the air conditioning system.

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select the vents used for air flow. An indicator light will illuminate to show which air flow mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have to select the air flow unless you desire another air flow mode.

1. PanelAir flows from the instrument panel vents and rear vents.

2. BilevelAir flows from both the floor vents, the instrument panel vents and rear vents.

3. FloorAir flows mainly from the floor vents.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

285

4. Floor/WindshieldAir flows mainly from the floor vents and windshield vents and fan speed may increase in order to clean up the front view.

This button allows the air intake to select FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in- take selector button once again.

5. WindshieldAir flows mainly from the windshield vents and fan speed may increase in order to clean up the front view.

Pressing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to select FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. It is not possible to return to RECIR- CULATE in this mode.

For details about air flow selector settings, see Air flow selector settings described below.

Air intake selector

Push the button to select the air source. An indicator light will illuminate to show which the air source is being selected.

1. RecirculateRecirculates the air inside the vehicle.

2. FreshDraws outside air into the sys- tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode may change automati- cally to FRESH depending on the condi- tion of the air conditioning system.

For example, when the ambient tempera- ture is low, the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH. This is not a malfunction.

If the ambient temperature is low when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the air intake mode is always set to FRESH even though the previous mode was RECIRCULATE.

A/C button

To turn on the air conditioning, push the A/C button. The A/C button indicator will come on. To turn the air conditioning off, push the button again.

If the A/C button indicator flashes, there is a problem in the air conditioning system and the air conditioning automatically shuts off. If this happens, take your ve- hicle to your Toyota dealer for service.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

286

To cool off your Toyota after it has been parked in the hot sun, drive with the windows open for a few minutes. This vents the hot air, allowing the air conditioning to cool the interior more quickly.

Make sure the air intake grilles in front of the windshield are not blocked (by leaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield. The windshield could fog up because of the difference in air temperature on the inside and outside of the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seats clear to allow air to circulate through- out the vehicle.

On cold days, set the fan speed to high for a minute to help clear the intake ducts of snow or moisture. This can reduce the amount of fogging on the windows.

When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust thrown up by the ve- hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake selector be set to FRESH and the fan speed selector to any setting except OFF.

Air flow selector settings Operating tips

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

287

If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air intake selector be temporarily set to RECIRCULATE, which will close off the outside passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the vehicle interior.

Heating

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation

Press in the AUTO button. TemperatureTo the desired

temperature Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air conditioningOFF

For manual operation

Fan speedTo the desired fan speed TemperatureTowards WARM Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowFLOOR Air conditioningOFF

For quick heating, select recirculated air for a few minutes. To keep the windows from fogging, select fresh af- ter the vehicle interior has been war- med.

Press the A/C button on for dehumidi- fied heating.

Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat the vehicle interior while defrosting or defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation

Press in the AUTO button. TemperatureTo the desired

temperature Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air conditioningON

For manual operation

Fan speedTo the desired fan speed TemperatureTowards COLD Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowPANEL Air conditioningON

For quick cooling, select recirculated air for a few minutes.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

288

Ventilation

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation

Press in the AUTO button. TemperatureTowards low temperature Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air conditioningOFF

For manual operation

Fan speedTo the desired fan speed TemperatureTowards COLD Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowPANEL Air conditioningOFF

Defogging and defrosting

The inside of the windshield

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation

TemperatureTowardshigh temperature to heat;low temperature to cool

Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowWINDSHIELD

For manual operation

Fan speedTo the desired fan speed TemperatureTowardshigh temperature

to heat;low temperature to cool

Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowWINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow button turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but- ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto- matically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.

It is not possible to return to RECIRCU- LATE in this mode.

Press the A/C button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.

On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshieldthe difference be- tween the outside and inside tempera- tures could make the fogging worse.

The outside of the windshield

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation

TemperatureTowards high temperature Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowWINDSHIELD

For manual operation

Fan speedTo the desired fan speed TemperatureTowards high temperature Air intakeFRESH (outside air) Air flowWINDSHIELD

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

289

Pressing the windshield air flow button turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but- ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto- matically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.

It is not possible to return to RECIRCU- LATE in this mode.

Press the A/C button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.

To heat the vehicle interior while de- frosting the windshield, choose floor/windshield air flow.

Center vents

Side vents

Rear vents

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the instrument panel and rear vents. The instrument panel and rear vents may be opened or closed as shown.

Instrument panel and rear vents

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

290

The air conditioning filter information label is placed on the upper right side of the glove box as shown and indi- cates that a filter has been installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dust from entering the vehicle through the air conditioning vent.

The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af- ter long use. The filter may need to be replaced if the air flow of the air condi- tioning and heater experiences extreme reductions in operating efficiency, or if the windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency, inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance sched- ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, such as inner city or desert areas, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the Scheduled Mainte- nance Guide or Owners Manual Supple- ment.)

Air conditioning filter Checking and replacing the air conditioning filter

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

291

1. Open the glove box. Remove the screw with a Phillipshead screw- driver and slide the hook as shown.

2. Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the claws.

3. Remove the filter case by holding both sides.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

292

4. Remove the filter from the filter case.

5. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is the just moderately dusty, it may be cleaned by blowing compressed air from the reverse surface. Do not wash or oil the filter.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When setting the filter to the filter case, ensure that the flat side of the filter is down and the ribbed side is up.

Position the filter case so that the UP mark is pointing up and install it in the vehicle.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop- erly in position. The use of air condi- tioning with the air filter removed may cause deteriorated dustproof per- formance and then affect air condi- tioning performance.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

293

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Other equipment Multiinformation display 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear view monitor system 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tissue box holder 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coin holder 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trash holder 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front cup holders 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cup holders and tray 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cup holders 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottle holders 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tiedown hooks 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery bag hooks 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo net hooks 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage cover 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double deck 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof luggage carrier 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 10

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

294

1. RESET button

2. MODE button

3. Air conditioning system without DUAL buttonCruise information display

Air conditioning system with DUAL buttonOutside temperature and cruise information display

4. Clock

5. Air conditioning system without DUAL button onlyOutside temperature display

6. :00 button

7. M button

8. H button

Multiinformation display

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

295

Operate the multiinformation display with the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the last previously used mode dis- played just before the ignition switch is turned off will appear.

If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the multiinformation display, the display will automatically be set to the initial mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

To reset the hour: Push the H button. To reset the minutes: Push the M button.

If quick adjustment to a full hour is de- sired, push the :00 button.

For example, if the :00 button is de- pressed when the time is between 1:011:29, the time will change to 1:00. If the time is between 1:301:59, the time will change to 2:00.

The key must be in the ACC or ON position.

If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the clock, the time dis- play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one oclock).

The displayed temperature ranges from 30C (22F) up to 50C (122F).

The key must be in the ON position.

If an abnormality exists in the connection of the outside air temperature sensor, C (F) will appear on the display. If C (F) appears on the display, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that C (F) appears momentarily when the ignition is quickly turned to ON. It is normal if it goes out soon.

Before using the multiinformation display Clock

Outside temperature display (air conditioning system without DUAL button)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

296

Air conditioning system with DUAL button only

The outside temperature display (air conditioning system with DUAL but- ton) and cruise information display indi- cates the following information.

Every time you push the MODE but- ton, the display toggles through this information.

1. Outside temperature

2. Driving range

3. Average fuel consumption

4. Average vehicle speed

5. Display off

The displayed values in the cruise infor- mation display indicate general driving conditions. Accuracy varies with driving habits and road conditions.

1. Outside temperature (OUTSIDE F or OUTSIDE C)

The displayed value is updated every 1 second.

The displayed temperature ranges from 30C (22F) up to 50C (122F).

If an abnormality exists in the connection of the outside air temperature sensor, C (F) will appear on the display. If C (F) appears on the display, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that C (F) appears momentarily when the ignition is quickly turned to ON. It is normal if it goes out soon.

Cruise information display

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

297

2. Driving range (RANGE MI or RANGE km)

The distance the vehicle can travel with the remaining fuel is calculated and displayed based on the quantity of re- maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The driving range display indicates the approximate distance that you can drive until the fuel gauge reaches E. It is different from the actual distance traveled.

The displayed value is updated about ev- ery 10 seconds.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal- culation is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv- ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con- sumption is good, the driving range will be longer than indicated. If fuel consumption is poor, the driving range will be shorter than indicated.

If the low fuel level warning light comes on, refuel the vehicle even if the display indicates that the vehicle can be driven further.

3. Average fuel consumption (AVG. MPG or AVG. L/100 km)

Average fuel consumption is calculated and displayed based on total driving distance and total fuel consumption with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated about ev- ery 10 seconds.

To reset the calculation, push the RESET button about 1 second.

4. Average vehicle speed (AVG. MPH or AVG. km/h)

Average vehicle speed is calculated and displayed based on total driving dis- tance and total driving time with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated about ev- ery 10 seconds.

To reset the calculation, push the RESET button about 1 second.

The direction is indicated on the inside rear view mirror.

If the ignition switch was turned off with the system on, the system will automati- cally turn back on when the ignition switch is turned on.

Push the COMP switch to turn the com- pass system on and off.

Compass

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

298

The compass indicates the direction that the vehicle is heading. In the above case, it shows that the vehicle is heading north.

Displays Directions

N NE E

SE S

SW W

NW

North Northeast

East Southeast

South Southwest

West Northwest

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately af- ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.

The ignition switch is turned off imme- diately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

The vehicle is in a place where the earths magnetic field is subject to in- terference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).

The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal object on or near the inside rear view mirror.)

The battery has been disconnected.

If your vehicle is out of the set zone, refer to CALIBRATING THE COMPASS below to set the zone number.

If the deviation is small, the compass works to calibrate the direction automati- cally while the vehicle is in motion.

For additional precision or for complete calibrating, see CALIBRATING THE COMPASS below.

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is on the wind- shield.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal object on or near the inside rear view mirror of the vehicle. Doing this may cause malfunction of the compass sensor.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

299

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation calibration)

The direction display on the compass deviates from the true direction deter- mined by the earths magnetic field. The angle of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle, then push and hold the COMP switch until the zone number appears on the dis- play. Then push the COMP switch, refer- ring to the following map to select the number of the zone where the vehicle is.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

300

Zone numbers

After calibration, leaving the system for several seconds returns it to the compass mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

301

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling calibration)

Sometimes the direction display on the compass may not change after a turn. To rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and hold the COMP switch until C appears on the display.

If C appears on the display because of a drastic change in the magnetic field, perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5 mph) or less. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration is completed when the direction is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed because of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your vehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just after you have purchased your Toyota. And then always perform circling calibration after the battery has been removed, re- placed or disconnected.

Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earths magnetic field is subject to in- terference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).

During calibration, do not operate elec- tric systems (moon roof, power win- dows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

302

CAUTION

When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and ve- hicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle while back- ing up. The left and right displayed on the screen are the same as those of the inside rear view mirror.

To display the rear view image on the screen, place the selector lever in the R position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

If you move the selector lever out of the R position, the screen returns to the previous screen. Operating another func- tion of the navigation system will display another screen.

The rear view monitor system is a supple- ment device intended to assist back up. When backing up, be sure to check be- hind and all around the vehicle visually.

CAUTION

Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when back- ing up. Always make sure your in- tended path is clear.

Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.

Never back up while looking only at the screen. The image on the screen is different from actual con- ditions. Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces will differ from actual distance. If you back up while looking only at the screen, you may hit a vehicle, a person or an object. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mir- rors before proceeding.

Rear view monitor system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

303

Do not use the system when the back door is not completely closed.

If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change. Be sure to have the cameras position and mounting angle checked at your Toyota dealer.

If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.

If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow, or mud ad- here to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse.

Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicles surroundings, as the dis- played image may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted, or not entirely visible when the outside temperature is low. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the ve- hicle visually and with mirror before proceeding.

When replacing the tires, please consult your Toyota dealer. If you replace the tires, the area displayed on the screen may change.

On screen

Corners of bumper

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

304

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN

Image is displayed approximately level on screen.

The area detected by the camera is limited. The camera does not detect objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper.

The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orien- tation or road conditions.

THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM CAMERA

The rear view monitor system camera is located on the back door as shown in the illustration. The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that ap- pears on the screen differs from the actu- al distance.

In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning.

In the dark (for example, at night)

When the temperature near the lens is high or low

When water droplets are adhering to the camera, or when humidity is high (for example, when it rains)

When foreign matter (for example, snow or mud) is adhering to the cam- era

When the sun or the beam of head- lights is shining directly into the cam- era lens

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

305

If a bright light (for example, sunlight re- flected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera, the smear effect peculiar to the camera may occur. : Smear effectA phenomenon that oc- curs when a bright light (for example, sun- light reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera; when trans- mitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it.

Rear console box

Luggage compartment

The power outlets are designed for power supply for car accessories.

In the rear console boxTo use the power outlet, push the lid of the auxil- iary box to open.

The key must be in the ACC or ON position for the power outlet to be used.

Power outlet (12 VDC)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

306

NOTICE

To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/120W.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use. Inserting anything other than an ap- propriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any liquid to get into the outlet may cause electrical fail- ure or short circuits.

This power outlet is designed for use as a power supply for electric ap- pliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the ON position for the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out- let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to use an appliance that requires more than 115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit will activate and cut the power supply. The power supply will restart automatically when you use an appliance that operates within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the main switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn the power outlet off. When the power out- let is not in use, make sure that the main switch is turned off.

Power outlet (115 VAC)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

307

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug that fits the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances even though their power consumption is un- der 115 VAC/100W. These appliances may not operate properly.

Appliances with high initial peak watt- age: cathoderay tube type televisions, compressordriven refrigerators, electric pumps, electric tools, etc.

Measuring devices which process pre- cise data: medical equipment, measur- ing instruments, etc.

Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply: microcomputer controlled electric blankets, touch sen- sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause radio noise.

To use the glove box:

Open by pulling the lever.

Lock by inserting the master key and turn- ing it clockwise.

Unlock by inserting the master key and turning it counterclockwise.

With the instrument panel lights on, the glove box light will come on.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving.

Glove box

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

308

On some models, an auxiliary box is located inside the glove box.

To increase the capacity of the glove box, raise the lower panel of the auxiliary box.

Indicator light

Buttons

The garage door opener (

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, etc.

Garage door opener

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

309

(a) Programming the HomeLink

The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can store one program for each button.

To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink, install a new battery in the handheld transmitter prior to program- ming.

The battery side of the handheld trans- mitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink during the programming pro- cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedure in Programming an entrance gate/pro- gramming all devices in the Canadian market.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.

Home Link

Handheld garage transmitter

25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

2. Place your handheld garage transmit- ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the handheld garage transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink but- ton.

Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.

4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

310

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden- tify if your garage transmitter is of the Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The ga- rage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink) flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is the Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading Programming a rolling code sys- tem.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re- maining HomeLink button to program another device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is Rolling Code equipped, it is necessary to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading Programming the HomeLink before proceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the training button on the ceil- ing mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owners guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the location of this training button.

2. Press the training button on the ceil- ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicles pro- grammed HomeLink button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does open, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink unit and be able activate the garage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re- maining HomeLink button to program another rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/program- ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink but- tons you want to program.

2. Place your handheld gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the handheld gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5 is complete.

5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

311

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device oper- ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re- maining HomeLink button to program another device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Toyota dealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased, however, to reprogram a single button, follow the procedure Programming the HomeLink.

(b) Operating the HomeLink

To operate the HomeLink, press the appropriate HomeLink button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink

indicator light should come on. The HomeLink continues to send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink

memory.

For additional programming assistance with your HomeLink Universal Transceiver call the:

The Toyota Customer Experience Center at 18003314331 (U.S.A.)

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre at 18888696828 (Canada)

Refer to HomeLink on the internet at: WWW.HOMELINK.COM

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

312

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or other device. Make sure people and ob- jects are out of the way of the ga- rage door or other device to pre- vent potential harm or damage.

Do not use this HomeLink Univer- sal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as re- quired by federal safety standards. (This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage door open- er which cannot detect an object (signaling the door to stop and re- verse), does not meet current feder- al safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS210 of the IC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device.

To use the auxiliary boxes, open the lids as shown in the following illustra- tions.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the auxiliary box closed while driving.

Type AAs this holder is designed for holding a light object such as eyeglasses, do not place any heavy objects in them. Heavy objects may cause the holder to open and the contents to fly out resulting in inju- ries.

NOTICE

Type ADuring hot weather, the inte- rior of the vehicle becomes very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.

Auxiliary boxes

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

313

Type A (overhead console)

Type B (instrument panel)

Type C (rear console box)

Type D (rear tire house)

Type E (right side of luggage compart- ment)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

314

The right side of luggage compartment auxiliary box is equipped with a belt to hold the objects.

To use the belt, do the following.

1. To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.

2. To tighten: Pull on the belt.

Make sure the objects are securely held.

CONSOLE BOX TABLE

To use the console box table, open it.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the table closed while driving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the table, do not place any object heavier than 1 kg (2.20 lb.) on it, and do not leave any object on the table for a long time.

Using the holding belts Rear console box

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

315

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, pull up the console box lid while pushing the lock release button.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the console box closed while driving.

The rear console box is equipped with a tissue box holder on the inside of the rear console box lid.

To use the tissue box holder:

1. Pull up the console box lid while push- ing the lock release button.

2. Place a tissue box in the lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop while driving, keep the console box lid closed when it is not in use.

Tissue box holder

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

316

The rear console box is equipped with a coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Pull up the console box lid while push- ing the lock release button.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

Coin holder Trash holder

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

317

The trash holder is designed to use the grocery bag as a trash bag.

To use the trash holder:

1. Raise the trash holder.

2. Fit the grocery bag onto the holder by hanging its handles on the two hooks indicated at the left and right.

The trash holder can support to 1 kg (2.20 lb.).

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop while driving, keep the trash holder closed when it is not in use.

If the trash holder is pulled strongly or stepped on, it will detach from the rear console box to protect it from damag- ing.

If the trash holder becomes detached, re- install it in a horizontal direction as indi- cated in the illustration. It cannot be installed in any other direction.

NOTICE

Do not deliberately pull or step on the trash holder, as it may be dam- aged or broken.

Front cup holders

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

318

The cup holders are designed for hold- ing cups or drinkcans securely.

The cup holder can be adjustable to the size of the cups or drinkcans by changing the holder position and the arm position, as shown.

With the instrument panel lights on, the front cup holder position indicator lights will come on.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than cups or drinkcans in the cup holder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly in- jured people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

The rear cup holders and tray are housed in the armrest.

The cup holders are designed to hold cups or beverage cans securely.

1. To use the rear cup holders and tray, pull the armrest out.

Rear cup holders and tray (vehicles without third seats)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

319

2. To use the rear cup holder, push and pull it out.

3. To use the tray, pull it out.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than cups or drinkcans in the cup holder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder closed when it is not in use.

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the tray closed while driving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the tray, do not place any object heavier than 2 kg (4.40 lb.) on it, and do not leave any object on the tray for a long time.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

320

Type A (armrest)

Type B (rear tire house)

The cup holders are designed for hold- ing cups or drinkcans securely.

Type ATo use the holder, pull the arm- rest out and push the lid.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than cups or drinkcans in the cup holder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

Type ATo reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder closed when it is not in use.

Front doors

Rear doors

Rear cup holders (vehicles with third seats) Bottle holders

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

321

The bottle holders are designed to hold bottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder for any other purpose for which it was intended. Inappropriately sized or shaped objects may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly in- jure people in the vehicle during a sudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle in the bottle holder because the con- tents may spill when the door opens or closes.

To secure your luggage, use the tie down hooks as shown above.

See Stowage precautions on page 351 in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie down hooks folded in place on the floor when not in use.

NOTICE

Do not use the seat anchors instead of the tiedown hooks.

These hooks are designed to hang things like grocery bags.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, do not hang any object heavier than 1 kg (2.20 lb.) in it.

Tiedown hooks Grocery bag hooks

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

322

These hooks are designed to hang the cargo net.

To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net hooks and rear tiedown hooks.

Although the cargo net itself is not in- cluded as an original equipment, these hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoid hanging things other than a cargo net on it.

USING LUGGAGE COVER

To use the luggage cover:

1. Attach the front hooks of the lug- gage cover to the head restraint.

2. Pull out the rear luggage cover and hook it on the anchors.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggage cover. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or a collision.

Cargo net hooks Luggage cover

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

323

REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER

To remove the luggage cover, detach its hooks from the head restraint. Then, retract and release both ends, and re- move the luggage cover.

After you remove the luggage cover, place it somewhere other than the passenger compartment. This will prevent passengers from injury in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

To use the double deck:

1. Turn the left and right knobs from the LOCK position to the UNLOCK position.

2. Hold the handle and raise the double deck on the rear tire houses.

Double deck

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

324

3. Turn the left and right knobs from the UNLOCK position to the LOCK position.

Make sure the double deck is securely locked.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop, make sure that the double deck knobs are always in the LOCK posi- tion when the double deck is in the raised or lowered position.

NOTICE

When using the double deck at the raised position, do not place any ob- ject heavier than 30 kg (66 lb.).

Roof luggage carrier

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

325

The roof luggage carrier consists of roof rails (1) attached to the roof and sliding cross rails (2).

To adjust the positions of cross rails, do this.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise to loosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the cross rails to the desired position for loading the luggages of various sizes.

3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten the cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

Follow the manufacturers instructions and precautions when installing the attach- ments or their equivalent.

When there is no luggage on the roof luggage carrier, Toyota recommends that the front and rear cross rails be secured in the positions indicated in the illustra- tion, according to the following procedure. This may diminish wind noise during driv- ing.

CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug- gage carrier, observe the following:

Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.

If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. (See Dimensions and weights on page 446 in Section 8 for information on your vehicle overall length and width.)

Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.

Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneu- vers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle cor- rectly.

If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then dur- ing the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.

Do not exceed 54 kg (120 lb.) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

326

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are designed for use with locking clips. Fix the floor mat with lock- ing clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driv- ing, it may cause an accident.

Floor mat

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

327

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR TOYOTA Information before driving your Toyota Offroad vehicle precautions 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Breakin period 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threeway catalytic converters 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridiumtipped spark plugs 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitedslip differential 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyotas identification 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

328

This vehicle belongs to the utility ve- hicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of offroad applications. Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passen- ger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. An advan- tage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. It is not de- signed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than lowslung sports cars de- signed to perform satisfactorily under offroad conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau- tions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your ve- hicle:

In a rollover crash, an unbelted per- son is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is mov- ing.

Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu- vers, if at all possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneu- vers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle cor- rectly.

Offroad vehicle precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

329

Always slow down in gusty cross- winds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your ve- hicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.

When driving offroad or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicles suspension and chassis.

Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your ve- hicle (or any similar offroad ve- hicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or back- ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate breakin. But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:

Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.

Avoid racing the engine.

Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).

Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast or slow.

Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un- leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mixups, your Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with un- leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan- dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5M93 in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will cause the three way catalytic converter to lose its ef- fectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly. Also, this can increase maintenance costs.

Breakin period Fuel

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

330

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. For improved vehicle performance, use premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating or research octane number lower than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will lead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even when using the recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Toyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a short time while accel- erating or driving up hills. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT ADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid buildup of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for quality fuel named WorldWide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied world wide. The WWFC consists of four categories that depend on required emission lev- els. In the U.S., category 3 or 4 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emis- sions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle per- formance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re- formulated gasoline that contains oxy- genates such as ethanol or MTBE is available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gas- oline provide excellent vehicle perfor- mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im- prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en- hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con- taining MMT is used, your emission con- trol system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in- strument cluster may come on. If this hap- pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser- vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems caused by the partic- ular gasoline that you are using. If you continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then consult your Toyota dealer.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

331

NOTICE

Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will cause fuel sys- tem damage or vehicle performance problems.

If driveability problems occur (poor hot starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue the use.

Take care not to spill gasohol dur- ing refueling. Gasohol may cause paint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup- plying fuel to the engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the ignition switch to ACC or LOCK once and start it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, it is the fuel system has been damaged and it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the engine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota in another country...

First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor- rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane number).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

332

The threeway catalytic converter is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

Keep people and combustible mate- rials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

Do not idle or park your vehicle over anything that might burn easi- ly such as grass, leaves, paper or rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the threeway catalytic converter may cause it to overheat and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other damage, observe the following precautions:

Use only unleaded gasoline.

Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creat- ing an excessive load on the three way catalytic converter.

Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more than 20 min- utes.

Avoid racing the engine.

Do not pushstart or pullstart your vehicle.

Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is moving.

Keep your engine in good running order. Malfunctions in the engine electrical system, electronic ignition system/distributor ignition system or fuel systems could cause an ex- tremely high threeway catalytic converter temperature.

If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, take your vehicle in for a checkup as soon as possible. Remember, your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle and its threeway catalytic converter sys- tem best.

To ensure that the threeway cata- lytic converter and the entire emis- sion control system operate proper- ly, your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections required by the Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supple- ment.

Threeway catalytic converters

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

333

CAUTION

Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.

Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose connections. The system should be checked from time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked immediately.

Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this a particularly dangerous situation.

Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with the engine run- ning. If it is unavoidable, however, do so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.

Keep the back door and back win- dow closed while driving. An open or unsealed back door and back window, may cause exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

To allow proper operation of your vehicles ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the wind- shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth- er obstructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with the windows open and the back door and back window closed. Have the cause im- mediately located and corrected.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in main- taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con- sume some engine oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows.

Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a pis- ton moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process.

Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel. High tem- perature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve stems.

Engine exhaust cautions Facts about engine oil consumption

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

334

The amount of engine oil consumed de- pends on the viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the conditions the vehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by highspeed driv- ing and frequent acceleration and decel- eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles)

When judging the amount of oil con- sumption, note that the oil may become diluted and make it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and consumes a nor- mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK

One of the most important points in prop- er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en- gine oil at the optimum level so that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential that the oil level be checked regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check, see Checking the engine oil level on page 420 in Section 72.

Your engine is fitted with iridiumtipped spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridiumtipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor- mance or smooth driveability.

Iridiumtipped spark plugs (4.7 L V8 [2UZFE] engine)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

335

This brake system has 2 independent hy- draulic circuits. If either circuit should fail, the other will still work. However, the ped- al will be harder to press, and your stop- ping distance will increase. Also, the brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses brake fluid pres- surized by the pump to powerassist the brakes. If the brake booster fails during driving, the brake system warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuous- ly. In this case, the brakes may not work properly. If they do not work well, depress the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system warning light comes on, immediately stop your vehicle and contact your Toyota deal- er.

It is not a malfunction that the brake sys- tem warning light may stay on for 60 sec- onds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the brake system warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the pedal uses up your brake fluid pressure reserve.

Even if the power assist is com- pletely lost, the brakes will still work. But you will have to push the pedal hard, much harder than nor- mal. And your braking distance will increase.

ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with ABS warning light)

The antilock brake system is designed to help prevent lockup of the wheels during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing directional stability and steer- ing performance of the vehicle under these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the antilock brake system function is in action, you may feel the brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the antilock brake system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performan- ce.

The antilock brake system becomes op- erative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Brake system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

336

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as on a manhole cov- er, a steel plate at a construction site, joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the antilock brake sys- tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the antilock brake system is in the selfcheck mode, and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the antilock brake system is ac- tivated, the following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a malfunc- tion of the system:

You may hear the antilock brake sys- tem operating and feel the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the ve- hicle body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor sound in the engine compartment even after the ve- hicle is stopped.

At the end of the antilock brake sys- tem activation, the brake pedal may move a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the antilock brake system: Although the antilock brake system assists in providing ve- hicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, be- cause there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with the anti lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the antilock brake system does not provide vehicle control.

Antilock brake system is not de- signed to shorten the stopping dis- tance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Compared with vehicles without an antilock brake system, your vehicle may require a longer stopping dis- tance in the following cases:

Driving on rough, gravel or snow covered roads.

Driving with tire chains installed.

Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.

Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differ- ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate pressure: The antilock brake system detects vehicle speeds using the speed sensors for respec- tive wheels turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting in a longer stopping dis- tance.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

337

Type A

Type B

ABS warning light

The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position. If the anti lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.

When the ABS warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the following systems do not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.

Antilock brake system

Brake assist system

Traction control system (twowheel drive models)

Active traction control system (fourwheel drive models)

AUTO LSD system (twowheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system (fourwheel drive models)

Hillstart assist control system

When the ABS warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the antilock brake system does not operate so that the wheels will lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.

VSC TRAC warning light may come on with the ABS warning light (brake assist system warning light) when there is a mal- function somewhere in the antilock brake system (brake assist system).

If either of the following conditions oc- curs, this indicates a malfunction some- where in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are dri- ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

338

CAUTION

If the ABS warning light remains on together with the brake system warn- ing light, immediately stop your ve- hicle at a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the antilock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unsta- ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate a malfunc- tion:

The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.

DRUMINDISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drumindisc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs beddingdown of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed- dingdown.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system judges as an emer- gency stop and provides more powerful braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow- erful braking will be applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal- function.

The brake assist system becomes opera- tive after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this systems warn- ing light, see Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers on page 147 in Sec- tion 16.

The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to where replacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro- tor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when necessary.

Brake pad wear limit indicators

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

339

Your Toyota is equipped with a limitedslip center differential (transfer). If one wheel begins to spin, the limitedslip center dif- ferential (transfer) is designed to aid trac- tion by automatically transmitting driving force to the wheels on the other drive axle. It transmits driving force to the front wheels if a rear wheel spins, and to the rear wheels if a front wheel spins.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by a jack. The vehicle could be driven off the jack and could pose a danger or re- sult in serious injury.

NOTICE

Use only a spare tire of the same brand, size, construction and load ca- pacity as the original tires on your Toyota because damage to the limit- edslip differential could possibly oc- cur with another tire type.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top of the instrument panel, and can be seen through the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the Certification Label.

Limitedslip differential (fourwheel drive models)

Your Toyotas identification Vehicle identification number

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

340

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven- tion labels which are approximately 47 mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat- ing the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in destroy- ing the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels intact from one part to anoth- er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention labels as it may vio- late certain state or federal laws.

Engine number Theft prevention labels (except for Canada)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

341

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling charac- teristics resulting in loss of control.

Suspension and chassis

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

342

This illustration indicates typical tire symbols. 1. Tire sizeFor details, see Tire

size on page 344. 2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)For details, see DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) on page 343.

3. Uniform tire quality grading For details, see Uniform tire quali- ty grading that follows.

4. The location of the tread wear indicatorsFor details, see Checking and replacing tires on page 427.

5. Tire ply composition and mate- rialsPlies mean a layer of rub- bercoated parallel cords. Cords mean the strands forming the plies in the tire.

6. Radial tires or biasply tiresA radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked with RADIAL is a biasply tire.

Tire information Tire symbols

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

343

7. TUBELESS or TUBE TYPEA tubeless tire does not have a tube inside the tire and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressureFor details, see Checking and replacing tires on page 427.

9. Maximum cold tire inflation pressureThis means the pres- sure to which a tire may be in- flated. For details about recom- mended cold tire inflation pressure, see Tires on page 451.

10.Summer tire or all season tireAn all season tire has M+S on the sidewall. The tire not marked with M+S is a summer tire. For details, see Types of tires on page 354.

This illustration indicates typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN). 1. DOT symbol 2. Tire Identification Number (TIN) 3. Tire manufacturer s identification

mark 4. Tire size code 5. Manufacturer s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters) 6. Manufacturing week 7. Manufacturing year

The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

344

This illustration indicates typical tire size. 1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use) 2. Section width (in millimeters) 3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width) 4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal) 5. Wheel diameter (in inches) 6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) 7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

1. Section width 2. Tire height 3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead 2. Sidewall 3. Shoulder 4. Tread 5. Belt 6. Inner liner 7. Reinforcing rubber 8. Carcass 9. Rim lines 10.Bead wires 11. Chafer

Tire size Name of each section of tire

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

345

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safe- ty Administration of the U.S. Depart- ment of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with in- formation on uniform tire quality grad- ing. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. DOT quality gradesAll passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed- eral Safety Requirements in addi- tion to these grades. Quality grades can be found where appli- cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum sec- tion width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested un- der controlled conditions on a speci- fied government test course. For ex- ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving hab- its, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, and they represent the tires ability to stop on wet pave- ment as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor trac- tion performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

Uniform tire quality grading

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

346

Temperature A, B, CThe tempera- ture grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resis- tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C cor- responds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of per- formance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not over- loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- tion, or excessive loading, either sep- arately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

347

Tire related term Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factoryinstalled equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressure tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition

Curb weight the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it is shown on the sidewall of the tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of (a) curb weight; (b) accessory weight; (c) vehicle capacity weight; and (d) production options weight

Glossary of tire terminology

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

348

Tire related term Meaning

Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicles desig- nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

349

Tire related term Meaning

Vehicle normal load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

350

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing ca- pacity and cargo capacity. Follow the load limits shown below. Total load ca- pacity and seating capacity are also described on the tire and loading in- formation label. For location of the tire and loading information label, see Checking tire inflation pressure on page 425. Total load capacity:

With 5 occupants: 431 kg (950 lb.)

With 7 occupants: 476 kg (1050 lb.)

Total load capacity means com- bined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Tongue load is in- cluded when trailer towing.

Seating capacity: Without third seats:

Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3) With third seats:

Total 7 (Front 2, Rear 5) Seating capacity means the maxi- mum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 68 kg (150 lb.) per person. Depending on the weight of each person, the seat- ing capacity given may exceed the total load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occu- pants are within the seating ca- pacity, do not exceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacity: For weight carrying hitch

2268 kg (5000 lb.) Also for weight distributing hitch (4.7 L V8 [2UZFE] engine only)

Twowheel drive models 3311 kg (7300 lb.)

Fourwheel drive models 3175 kg (7000 lb.)

Towing capacity means the maxi- mum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

Vehicle load limits

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

351

Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or de- crease depending on the size (weight) and the number of occupants. For de- tails, see Capacity and distribution that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more than each load limit. That may cause not only damage to the tires, but also deterioration to the steering ability and braking ability, which may cause an accident.

When stowing cargo and luggage in the vehicle, observe the following: Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at all possible. Be sure all items are se- cured in place.

Be careful to keep the vehicle bal- anced. Locating the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain balance.

For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as pos- sible.

Do not store more than 91 kg (200 lb.) of cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment. If the third seats are occupied, do not store cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment.

Do not place anything on the flattened seat or it may slide forward during braking.

Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer seri- ous bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking or a colli- sion.

Cargo and luggage Stowage precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

352

Do not place anything on the luggage cover. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or an accident. Secure all items in a safe place.

Do not drive with objects left on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the drivers field of view. Or they may move during sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and im- pair the drivers control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occu- pants.

Cargo capacity depends on the to- tal weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac- ity) (Total weight of occupants) STEPS FOR DETERMINING CORRECT LOAD LIMIT 1. Locate the statement The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicles placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug- gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400750 (5x150)=650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available car- go and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, see page 362.

Capacity and distribution

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

353

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity

EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLE In case that 2 people with the com- bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are riding in your vehicle with the total load capacity of 431 kg (950 lb.), the available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity will be as follows:

With 5 occupants: 431 kg 166 kg = 265 kg. (950 lb. 366 lb. = 584 lb.)

With 7 occupants: 476 kg 166 kg = 310 kg. (1050 lb. 366 lb. = 684 lb.)

From this condition, if 3 more passen- gers with the combined weight of 176 kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car- go and luggage load will be reduced as follows:

With 5 occupants: 265 kg 176 kg = 89 kg. (584 lb. 388 lb. = 196 lb.)

With 7 occupants: 310 kg 176 kg = 134 kg. (683 lb. 388 lb. = 295 lb.)

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of occupants who got on later must be reduced. In other words, if the increase in the number of occupants causes the excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you have to reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. For details about total load capacity, see Vehicle load limits on page 350.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu- pants weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capac- ity, do not apply the load uneven- ly. That may cause not only dam- age to the tire but also deteriora- tion to the steering ability due to unbalance of the vehicle, causing an accident.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

354

Cargo capacity

Weight of the removed third seat

SEATING CONFIGURATION VARIATION In case of removing the rear seats, it is possible to load as much cargo as the weight of the removed seats. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac- ity) (Total weight of occupants) + (Weight of the removed rear seats) Rear seats weights:

Each seat 11 kg (24 lb.)

Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped with. 1. Summer tires Summer tires are highspeed capabil- ity tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snowcovered or icy roads. For driving on snowcovered or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. 2. All season tires All season tires are designed to pro- vide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use all year round.

All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. The details about how to distinguish summer tires from all season tires are described on page 342.

CAUTION

Do not mix summer and all sea- son tires on your vehicle as this can cause dangerous han- dling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

Do not use tire other than the manufacturers designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels of the sizes different from the originals.

Types of tires

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

355

STARTING AND DRIVING Starting and driving Before starting the engine 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 357. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offroad driving precautions 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 371. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

356

1. Check the area around the vehicle be- fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, seat cushion angle, head restraint height and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition key to START position and release it, the cranking hold function continues to crank the engine in ON position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engine after about 25 seconds maximum if the engine has not started yet. When you crank the engine again, wait a few sec- onds and restart it.

If you hold the key in START position, the function will keep cranking for about 30 seconds maximum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- sories.

3. Put the selector lever in P. If you need to restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, put the selector le- ver in N. A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the selector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving off.

Before starting the engine How to start the engine Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

357

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol- low the instructions in (a) Before crank- ing.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen- tial multiport fuel injection system in your engine automatically controls the proper airfuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START position, then release it.

Engine should be warmed up by driving, not in idle. For warming up, drive with smoothly turning engine until engine cool- ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce- dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See If your vehicle will not start on page 374 in Section 4.

NOTICE

Do not race a cold engine.

If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.

Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you much better control.

Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos- sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving onto high, sharpedged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage such as a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a bumpy road. Other- wise, the impact could cause severe damage to the tires and/or wheels.

When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking brake, and place the transmis- sion in P. If necessary, block the wheels.

Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that there is no traffic near you, and then press the pedal lightly. If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while lightly pressing the brake pedal with the park- ing brake applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the road and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

(b) Starting the engine Tips for driving in various conditions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

358

Vehicles with rear height control air suspension: When you drive on a bumpy road, it is recommended that the vehicle height should be set in the N (normal) or H (high) mode.

CAUTION

Before driving off, make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.

Do not leave your vehicle unat- tended while the engine is running.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear, and poor fuel economy.

To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes excessively, they may overheat and not work properly.

Be careful when accelerating, up- shifting, downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. Sudden accelera- tion or engine braking, could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.

Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to con- sult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are highspeed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Also, the park- ing brake will not hold the vehicle securely.

Vehicles with rear height control air suspension: If you drive through deep water over about 700 mm (28 in.) in depth, put the vehicle height in the H (high) mode with the height select switch and then turn off the rear height control air sus- pension by pushing the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch. Drive your vehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or low- er speed.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

359

When driving your vehicle offroad, please observe the following precautions to en- sure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to offroad vehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where offroad vehicles are permitted to trav- el.

b. Respect private property. Get owners permission before entering private prop- erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that re- strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi- tions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to pre- vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle offroad, consult the following organizations.

State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments

State Motor Vehicle Bureau

Recreational Vehicle Clubs

U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau- tions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your ve- hicle:

Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.

Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving offroad. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.

Always check your brakes for effec- tiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.

After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the under- body. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted per- son is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is mov- ing.

When driving offroad or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicles suspension and chassis.

Offroad driving precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

360

NOTICE

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur.

Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.

Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also en- ter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oils lubricating qualities.

Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system com- ponents.

Always perform a maintenance in- spection after each day of offroad driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance informa- tion, refer to the Scheduled Main- tenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro- tected against freezing.

Only use Toyota Super Long Life Coolant or similar high quality ethylene glycol based nonsilicate, nonamine, nonnitrite, and nonborate coolant with longlife hy- brid organic acid technology. (Coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and or- ganic acids.)

See Checking the engine coolant level on page 422 in Section 72 for details of coolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant pro- vides protection down to about 35C (31F).

For the CanadaToyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant pro- vides protection down to about 42C (44F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Winter driving tips

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

361

Check the condition of the battery and cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter starting. Section 73 tells you how to visually in- spect the battery. Your Toyota dealer and most service stations will be pleased to check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold weather.

See page 420 in Section 72 for recom- mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum- mer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call your Toyota dealerthey will be pleased to help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock deicer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti- freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyota dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturers directions for how much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may dam- age your vehicles paint.

Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into P and block the front wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may freeze, making it hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the fenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you carry some emer- gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains, window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel, jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Dinghy towing

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

362

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passengerandloadcarrying vehicle. Tow- ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability and driving economy (fuel consumption, etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cautious driving habits. For your safe- ty and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your local Toyota dealer for further details be- fore towing.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control air suspension: When disconnecting a trailer, put the vehicle height in the LO (low) mode and push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn off the rear height control air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may be changed in the auto- matic leveling function, resulting in accident. For details see Rear height control air suspension on page 184 in Section 17.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail- er weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, build- ing supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

For weight carrying hitch

Also for weight distributing hitch

Trailer towing

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

363

CAUTION

The maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus cargo weight) must never exceed the following for vehicle with equipped. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

According to the hitch receiver type, the maximum gross trailer weight and hitch that can be used differs. Refer to the above illustra- tions to confirm the hitch receiver type for your vehicle.

For weight carrying hitch 2268 kg (5000 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch (4.7 L V8 [2UZFE] engine only)

Twowheel drive models 3311 kg (7300 lb.)

Fourwheel drive models 3175 kg (7000 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh- ing over 2268 kg (5000 lb.), Toyota recommends to use a weight dis- tributing hitch.

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh- ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is necessary to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity. The combination of the gross trailer weight added to the total weight of the vehicle, occupants and vehicle cargo must never exceed a total of the following.

For weight carrying hitch 4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine

4354 kg (9600 lb.) 4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine

4422 kg (9750 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch (4.7 L V8 [2UZFE] engine only)

5443 kg (12000 lb.)

Exceeding the maximum weight of the trailer, the vehicle, or the ve- hicle and trailer combination, can cause an accident resulting in seri- ous personal injuries.

Trailer hitch assemblies have differ- ent weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capa- ble of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maxi- mum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating speci- fied for the trailerhitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in seri- ous personal injuries.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

364

The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The gross vehi- cle weight is the sum of weights of the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas- sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. It also includes the weight of any special equipment installed on your vehicle.

The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed the front and rear Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight 100 = 10%

The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 10% of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the maximum load of the following.

For weight carrying hitch 227 kg (500 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch (4.7 L V8 [2UZFE] engine only)

Twowheel drive models 331 kg (730 lb.)

Fourwheel drive models 317 kg (700 lb.)

Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should be in the front half of the trailer and the remaining 40% in the rear.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

365

HITCHES

If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you should consult with your Toyota dealer.

Use only a hitch recommended by the hitch manufacturer and the one which conforms to the total trailer weight re- quirement.

According to the hitch receiver type, the maximum gross trailer weight and hitch that can be used differs. Refer to the above illustrations to confirm the hitch receiver type for your vehicle.

If you wish to install an aftermarket hitch, the hitch must be bolted securely to the vehicle frame and installed ac- cording to the hitch manufactures in- structions.

The hitch ball and king pin should have a light coat of grease.

Toyota recommends the ball mount as- sembly be removed when not towing to prevent injury and to prevent damage in the event of a rear end collision. After removing the ball mount assem- bly, install the grommet to the hitch to prevent entry of dirt and mud.

CAUTION

Do not tow the vehicle using the hooked portion of the weight carrying hitch. The hooked portion may break and cause serious injury or damage to the vehicle.

NOTICE

Do not install weight distributing hitch to weight carrying hitch re- ceiver because it will be damaged your vehicle.

Do not use axlemounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires. Also, never install a hitch which may interfere with the normal function of an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if so equipped.

1 Trailer ball load rating 2 Ball diameter 3 Shank length 4 Shank diameter

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

366

TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly deter- mine the correct trailer ball for your ap- plication:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball size for the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size. The sizes you will most likely find stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

IV 2 5/16 in.

II and III 2 in.

I 1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to match or exceed the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer. The trailer ball load rating should be printed on the top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, the threaded ball shank must protrude be- yond the bottom of the lock washer and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer ball shank must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter size.

NOTICE

Only use a ball mount attachment specified for the Toyota 4runner.

1 Coupler 2 Trailer ball 3 Ball mount attachment

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

No matter which class of tow hitch ap- plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup on must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applica- ble federal and state/provincial regu- lations.

A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in case it becomes dam- aged or separated. For correct safety chain procedures, follow the hitch or trailer manufacturers recommenda- tions.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

367

CAUTION

If the total trailer weight exceeds 453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are required.

Never tap into your vehicles hy- draulic system as it would lower its braking effectiveness.

Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering over into another lane.

SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWING BRAKE CONTROLLER

Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the towing brake controller as shown. Link the connector to the tow- ing brake controller via the sub wire har- ness stored in the glove box. The detailed explanation of the sub wire harness circuit is packed together with the sub wire har- ness.

Be sure to position the towing brake con- troller where it does not prevent the driver from operating the pedal.

Toyota recommends that the sub wire har- ness be stored in the glove box when it is not in use.

TIRES

Ensure that your vehicles tires are properly inflated. See page 425 in Sec- tion 72 and page 451 in Section 8 for instructions.

The trailer tires should be inflated to the pressure recommended by the trail- er manufacturer in respect to the total trailer weight.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

368

TOWING CONNECTOR FOR TRAILER LIGHTS

Your vehicle is equipped with a wire harness stored in the rear end under body. Some models are fitted with a socket for trailer lights under the rear bumper. Use either of them to connect and operate the trailer lights. However, the trailer lights must comply with fed- eral, state/provincial and local regula- tions. See your local recreational ve- hicle dealer or rental agency for the correct type of wiring and relays for your trailer. Check for correct operation of the turn signals and stop lights each time you hitch up. Direct splicing may damage your vehicles electrical system and cause a malfunction of your lights.

The towing connector can be also con- nected to the trailer brake and trailer sub battery.

BREAKIN SCHEDULE

Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train com- ponent (engine, transmission, differen- tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first 800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. For this informa- tion, please refer to the scheduled maintenance information in the Sched- uled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

CONNECTING A TRAILER (models with rear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:

1. Put the rear height control air suspen- sion in the LO (low) mode. Turn the ignition switch off or push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn off the rear height control air suspension.

2. Connect a trailer.

3. Turn the ignition switch on or push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn on the rear height control air sus- pension. Select the N (normal) mode with the height select switch.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

369

DISCONNECTING A TRAILER (models with rear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:

1. Put the rear height control air suspen- sion in the LO (low) mode. (Make sure the vehicle height is in the LO (low) mode by pushing the height se- lect switch on the side.)

2. Turn the ignition switch off or push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn off the rear height control air sus- pension.

3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer on the ground and raise the hitch by 100 mm (4 in.).

4. Turn the ignition switch on or push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn on the rear height control air sus- pension.

5. Wait for about 20 seconds until the rear vehicle height is lowered by the automatic leveling function.

6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If not, raise the hitch higher and repeat steps 2 through 5.

7. Move the vehicle forward in the LO (low) mode where the hitch does not touch anything in the N (normal) mode.

8. Put the rear height control air suspen- sion in the N (normal) mode.

PRETOWING SAFETY CHECK

Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has an abnormal noseup or nosedown condition, and check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes.

Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded so that it cannot shift.

Check that your rear view mirrors con- form to any applicable federal, state/ provincial or local regulations. If not, install the rear view mirrors required for towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently than when not tow- ing. The three main causes of vehicle trailer accidents are driver error, exces- sive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when towing:

Before starting out, check operation of the lights and all vehicletrailer connec- tions. After driving a short distance, stop and recheck the lights and con- nections. Before actually towing a trail- er, practice turning, stopping and back- ing with a trailer in an area away from traffic until you learn the feel.

Backing with a trailer is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right. (This pro- cedure is generally opposite to that when backing without a trailer.) Also, just turn the steering wheel a little at a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when backing to reduce the risk of an acci- dent.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

370

Because stopping distance may be in- creased, vehicletovehicle distance should be increased when towing a trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length between you and the ve- hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera- tion.

Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns. The trailer could hit your vehicle in a tight turn. Slow down before making a turn to avoid the necessity of sudden braking.

Remember that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Therefore, compensate for this by making a larger than normal turning radius with your vehicle.

Crosswinds and rough roads will ad- versely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention to the rear from time to time to pre- pare yourself for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying happens, firmly grip the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately but gradually. Never increase speed. Steer straight ahead. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

Be careful when passing other ve- hicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer and be sure you have plenty of room befo- re changing lanes.

In order to maintain engine braking effi- ciency, do not put the transmission in D.

Because of the added load of the trail- er, your vehicles engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 30C [85F]) when going up a long or steep grade with a trailer. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull off the road and stop in a safe spot. Refer to If your vehicle overheats on page 378 in Section 4.

Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. Put the transmission in P. Avoid park- ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only after performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un- der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release your brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into P and turn off the engine.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

371

When restarting out after parking on a slope:

1. With the transmission in P position, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower. Because insta- bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle trailer combination usually in- creases as the speed increases, ex- ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may cause loss of control.

Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden down- shifts.

Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking effi- ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easyjust take it easy. It will help make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:

Keep your tires inflated at the cor- rect pressure. Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel. See page 425 in Section 72 for instructions.

Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater fuel consumption.

Avoid lengthy warmup idling. Once the engine is running smoothly, begin drivingbut gently. Remember, howev- er, that on cold winter days this may take a little longer.

Put the selector lever into the D when engine braking is not required. Driving with the selector lever in 4 will reduce the fuel economy. (For de- tails, see Automatic transmission on page 159 in Section 17.)

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high gear as quickly as possible.

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

372

Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start again later.

Avoid engine lugging or overrev- ving. Use a gear position suitable for the road on which you are travelling.

Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down. Stopandgo driving wastes fuel.

Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis- tance from other vehicles to avoid sud- den braking. This will also reduce wear on your brakes.

Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.

Maintain a moderate speed on high- ways. The faster you drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your speed, you will cut down on fuel con- sumption.

Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc. This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corro- sion.

Keep your vehicle tunedup and in top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp- er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine performance and con- tribute to poor fuel economy. For longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more frequent maintenance. (For scheduled maintenance informa- tion, please refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manu- al Supplement.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your power steering and brake booster will not function with- out the engine running. Also, the emission control system operates properly only when the engine is run- ning.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

373

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY In case of an emergency If your vehicle will not start 374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase engine speed 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 394. . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 395. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

374

Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting pro- cedure given in How to start the engine on page 356 in Section 3 and that you have sufficient fuel. Also, check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your Toyota dealer. If none of your keys work, there may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call your Toyota dealer. (See Keys on page 12 in Section 12.)

If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too slowly

1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked, the battery is discharged. You may try jump start- ing. See (c) Jump starting on page 375 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not pull or pushstart the ve- hicle. It may damage the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts. Also the threeway catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not start

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC or LOCK and try starting the engine again.

2. If the engine will not start, the engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking. See (b) Starting a flooded engine on page 374 for further instruc- tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition key to START with the accelerator pedal fully depressed, and hold the key at this posi- tion for about 30 seconds. Then the cranking hold function stops cranking au- tomatically, and you can try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start, wait a few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

If your vehicle will not start (a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

375

To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your vehicle which might re- sult from battery explosion, acid burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic components, these instructions must be followed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we strongly recommend that you seek the help of a competent me- chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin, clothing, or ve- hicle.

If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and flush the affected area with water imme- diately. Then get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while en route to the medical office.

The gas normally produced by a battery will explode if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or light a match while jump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you are sure that the booster battery is correct.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unneces- sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery of matching or higher quality. Any other battery may be difficult to jump start with.

If jump starting is difficult, charge the battery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster and discharged batter- ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the batteries. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not running, start it and let it run for a few minutes. During jump starting run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.

(c) Jump starting

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

376

Positive terminal (+ mark)

Jumper cable Positive terminal (+ mark)

Booster battery

Discharged battery

4. Make the cable connections in the or- der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive (red) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the booster battery.

Discharged battery

Booster battery

Negative terminal ( mark)

Jumper cable

c. Connect the clamp of the negative (black) jumper cable to the negative () terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black) jumper cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic point of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

The recommended connecting points are shown in the following illustrations:

Connecting point for 4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine

Connecting point for 4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

377

Do not connect the cable to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, to avoid serious injury, do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the jumper cables or clamps touch any- thing except the correct battery termi- nals or the ground.

5. Charge the discharged battery with the jumper cables connected for approxi- mately 5 minutes. At this time, run the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery at about 2000 rpm with the ac- celerator pedal lightly depressed.

6. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.

7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order: the negative cable and then the positive cable.

8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover clothsthey may now contain sulfuric acid.

9. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your Toyota dealer.

If the first start attempt is not success- ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumper cables are tight. Recharge the discharged battery with the jumper cables connected for several minutes and restart your en- gine in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful, the battery may be depleted. Have it ch- ecked at your Toyota dealer.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to ACC or LOCK, and try starting the engine again.

If the engine will not start, see If your vehicle will not start on page 374 in this Section.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow- er assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual.

If your engine stalls while driving

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

378

If engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in the elec- tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev- er, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to the ACC or LOCK position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro- neous pedal operation.

If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, if you ex- perience a loss of power, or if you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has probably overheated. You should follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve- hicle and turn on your emergency flashers. Put the transmission in P and apply the parking brake. Turn off the air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the radiator or reservoir, stop the engine. Wait until the steam subsides before opening the hood. If there is no coolant boiling over or steam, leave the engine running.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is a sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle. However, note that water draining from the air conditioning is normal if it has been used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from the moving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the coolant is leaking, stop the engine im- mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as- sistance.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and there are no obvious leaks, you may help the engine cool down more quickly by running it at about 1500 rpm for a few minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add coolant to the reservoir while the engine is running. Fill it about half full. For the coolant type, see Coolant type selection on page 422 in Section 72.

If you cannot increase engine speed If your vehicle overheats

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

379

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out under pressure.

7. After the engine coolant temperature has cooled to normal, again check the coolant level in the reservoir. If neces- sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri- ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the system. You should have it checked as soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cau- tiously off the road to a safe place well away from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in P.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve- hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possi- bility of personal injury: Follow jacking instructions. Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup- ported by the jack. Otherwise, personal injury may occur.

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in P. Block the wheel diago- nally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.

If you have a flat tire

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

380

Make sure to set the jack prop- erly in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improper- ly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the ve- hicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.

Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing.

Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.

Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire and wheel beyond repair.

Vehicles with rear height con- trol air suspension: When jacking up or installing the tire chains, be sure to turn off the rear height control and stop the engine. Other- wise, the vehicle height may change in the automatic lev- eling function, resulting in accident.

1. Get the required tools and spare tire. 1. Tool bag 2. Jack

To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize yourself with the use of the jack, each of the tools and their storage locations. When storing the tool bag, make sure it is securely held by the tightening strap.

Required tools and spare tire

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

381

Turn the jack joint by hand. To remove: Turn the joint in direction 1 until the jack is free. To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 until the jack is firmly secured to pre- vent it flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.

To remove the spare tire under the luggage compartment: 1. Put a jack handle and jack handle

extensions together as shown in the illustration. 1. Jack handle extensions 2. Jack handle

When connecting the jack handle ex- tensions, use the jack handle to tight- en the square head bolt. Make sure that the bolt fits into the depression on the joint. When connecting the jack handle ex- tension with the jack handle, tighten the round head bolt by hand.

NOTICE

Tighten the square head bolt securely. Otherwise, the exten- sion may come off and it may damage the paint or vehicle body.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

382

2. Insert the end of the jack handle extension into the lowering screw and turn it counterclockwise with the handle.

3. After the tire is lowered completely to the ground, remove the holding bracket.

When storing the spare tire, put it in place with the outer side of the wheel facing up. Then secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight up without catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.

2. Block the wheel diagonally op- posite the flat tire to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.

3. Remove the wheel ornament. Pry off the wheel ornament, using the beveled end of the wheel nut wrench as shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna- ment by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Blocking the wheel Removing wheel ornament

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

383

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts. Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen. To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so that the handle is on the right side, as shown above. Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up on the han- dle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip off the nut. Do not remove the nuts yetjust un- screw them about onehalf turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious ac- cident.

Front Rear

5. Position the jack at the correct jack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid place. JACK POINTS:

FrontUnder the frame side rail RearUnder the rear axle housing

Loosening wheel nuts Positioning the jack

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

384

Put a jack handle, jack handle exten- sions and jack handle end together as shown in the illustration. 1. Jack handle end 2. Jack handle extensions 3. Jack handle

When connecting the jack handle ex- tension(s) and jack handle end, use the jack handle to tighten the square head bolt. Make sure that the bolt fits into the depression on the joint. When connecting the jack handle ex- tension with the jack handle, tighten the round head bolt by hand.

NOTICE

Tighten the square head bolt securely. Otherwise, the exten- sion may come off and it may damage the paint or vehicle body.

Front of vehicle

6. After making sure that no one is in the vehicle, as the jack touches the vehicle and begins to fit, doublecheck that it is properly positioned.

Rear side only When positioning the jack under the rear axle housing, make sure the groove on the top of the jack fits with the rear axle housing.

Raising your vehicle

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

385

7. Raise the vehicle high enough so that the spare tire can be installed.

Remember you will need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tire than when removing the flat tire. To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle end into the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise with the han- dle.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.

8. Remove the wheel nuts and change tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside. Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts.

Changing wheels

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

386

Before putting on wheels, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels without good metaltomet- al contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving.

9. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin- ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end inward) and tighten them as much as you can by hand. Press back on the tire back and see if you can tighten them more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead to overtightening the nuts and damaging the bolts. The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a seri- ous accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut, clean it.

Reinstalling wheel nuts

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

387

10.Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle extension coun- terclockwise with handle to lower the vehicle. Use only the wheel nut wrench and turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do not use other tools or any addition- al leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench is securely en- gaged over the nut. Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown. Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons around will not be injured as the vehicle is lowered to the ground.

Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque wrench to 110 Nm (11.5 kgfm, 83 ftlbf), as soon as possible after changing wheels. Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.

11.Reinstall the wheel ornament. Put the wheel ornament into position and then tap it firmly with the side or heel of your hand to snap it into place.

Lowering your vehicle Reinstalling wheel ornament

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

388

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Do not attach a heavily dam- aged plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents while the ve- hicle is moving.

12.Check the air pressure of the re- placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi- cation designated on page 451 in Section 8. If the pressure is lower, drive slowly to the nearest service station and fill to the correct pressure. Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla- tion valve cap as dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and possibly cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, have a new one put on as soon as possible. 13.Restow all the tools, jack and

flat tire securely. As soon after changing wheels as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torque specified on page 451 in Sec- tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have a technician repair the flat tire.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and flat tire are se- curely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a colli- sion or sudden braking.

After changing wheels

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

389

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward.

Turn off the traction control system to become unstuck to allow the tires to spin enough to remove the vehicle from the obstruction. (For details, see Trac- tion control system on page 170 in Section 17.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and back- ward if people or objects are any- where near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or ob- jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe the following precautions to prevent dam- age to the transmission and other parts.

Do not depress the accelerator ped- al while shifting the selector lever or before the transmission is com- pletely shifted to forward or reverse gear.

Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the wheels.

If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle several times, consider other ways such as tow- ing.

From front

From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Twowheel drive models

If your vehicle becomes stuck If your vehicle needs to be towed

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

390

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front

From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Fourwheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Toyota dealer or a commercial tow truck ser- vice. In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using either (a) or (b).

Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a Toyota dealer or com- mercial tow truck service, tow your ve- hicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in Emergency tow- ing on page 392 in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly. Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle, make sure the following pre- cautions are observed. If necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use a towing dolly.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control air suspension: When your vehicle is towed, put the vehicle height in the N (normal) mode and push the HEIGHT CONTROL OFF switch to turn off the rear height control air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may be changed in the auto- matic leveling function, resulting in accident. For details, see Rear height control air suspension on page 184 in Section 17.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

391

Twowheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From frontUse a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.

From rearPlace the ignition key in the ACC position.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged dur- ing towing.

Do not tow with the key removed or in the LOCK position, as the steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight while towing.

(b) Using flat bed truck

Fourwheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

FULLTIME FOUR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS

Use a towing dolly under the wheels not lifted by the truck.

MULTIMODE FOUR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS

From frontUse a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.

From rearWe recommend using a tow- ing dolly under the front wheels. If you do not use a towing dolly, place the ignition key in the ACC position, put the trans- mission in N and the multimode control switch knob in H2.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged dur- ing towing.

Do not tow with the key removed or in the LOCK position when tow- ing from the rear without a towing dolly. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

(b) Using flat bed truck

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

392

(c) Towing with sling type truck

All models

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei- ther from the front or rear. This may cause body damage.

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Toyota dealer or a commercial tow truck ser- vice.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be tempo- rarily towed by a cable or chain se- cured to one of the emergency towing eyelets under the front of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicles.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing eyelet; otherwise your vehicle may be dam- aged.

Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hardsurfaced roads for a short dis- tance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve- hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.

Emergency towing

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

393

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake and put the transmission in N. The key must be in ACC (engine off) or ON (engine running).

Fourwheel drive modelsOn multimode fourwheel drive models, put the multi mode control switch knob in H2. On full time fourwheel drive models, unlock the center differential.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow- er assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual.

Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not loose.

Fasten the towing cable or chain se- curely to the eyelet.

Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force.

To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

If the emergency towing eyelet is used to get out when your vehicle becomes struck in mud, sand or oth- er condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power, make sure to observe the pre- cautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive stress will be put on the eyelet and the towing cable or chain may break, causing serious injury or damage.

If the towing vehicle can hardly move, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact your Toyota dealer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.

Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.

Keep away from the vehicle during towing.

Emergency towing eyelet precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

394

The following methods are effective to get out when your vehicle is struck in mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power. Use extreme cau- tion when towing vehicles. In addition, keep away from the vehicles and towing cable or chain when towing.

Remove the soil and sand in the front and the back of the tires.

Place a stone or wood under the tires.

If you cannot shift the selector lever out of the P position to other posi- tions even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position. Make sure the parking brake is set.

2. Pry up the cover with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.

3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalent into the hole to push down the shift lock override button. You can shift out of the P position only while pushing the button.

4. Shift into the N position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety, keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Tips for towing a stuck vehicle

If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

395

You can purchase a new key at your Toyota dealer if you can give them the key number and master key.

Even if you lose only one key, contact your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If you lose all your master keys, you cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobi- lizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in Keys on page 12 in Section 12.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota dealers can still open the door for you, using their special tools. If you must break a window to get in, we suggest breaking the smallest side window be- cause it is the least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from the glass.

Please contact your nearest Toyota dealer and you can purchase a new wireless remote control transmitter.

Have the registered identification numbers of your transmitters deleted from your ve- hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft or an accident. Then, have the identification number of your new transmitter registered. At the same time, you must bring all of the remaining transmitters to have them registered again as well.

If you lose your keys If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

396

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

397

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE Corrosion prevention and appearance care Protecting your Toyota from corrosion 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 399. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rain clearing mirrors 403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

398

Toyota, through the diligent research, de- sign and use of the most advanced technology available, helps prevent corro- sion and provides you with the finest qual- ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to you. Proper care of your Toyota can help ensure longterm corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle are:

The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in hardtoreach areas under the vehicle.

Chipping of paint, or undercoating caused by minor accidents or by stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live in particular areas or operate your ve- hicle under certain environmental condi- tions:

Road salt or dust control chemicals will accelerate corrosion, as will the pres- ence of salt in the air near the sea coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

High humidity accelerates corrosion es- pecially when temperatures range just above the freezing point.

Wetness or dampness to certain parts of your vehicle for an extended period of time, may cause corrosion even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.

High ambient temperatures can cause corrosion to those components of the vehicle which do not dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep your vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible and to repair any dam- age to paint or protective coatings as soon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on your Toyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of course, necessary to keep your vehicle clean by regular washing, but to prevent corrosion, the following points should be observed:

If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least once a month to minimize cor- rosion.

High pressure water or steam is effec- tive for cleaning the vehicles underside and wheel housings. Pay particular attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud and debris without removing. The lower edge of doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped water in these areas can cause corrosion.

Wash the underside of the vehicle thor- oughly when winter is over.

See Washing and waxing your Toyota on page 399 in this Section for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicles paint and trim. If you find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up im- mediately to prevent corrosion from start- ing. If the chips or scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified body shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota from corrosion

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

399

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa- ter and dirt can accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc- casionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Be particularly care- ful when transporting chemicals, cleans- ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should be transported in proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately clean and dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If you drive on salted or gravel roads, mud shields help protect your vehicle. Fullsize shields, which come as near to the ground as possible, are the best. We recommend that the fittings and the area where the shields are installed be treated to resist corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be happy to assist in supplying and installing the shields if they are recommended for your area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti- lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be so damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor- rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.

The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos- sible.

When driving in a coastal area

When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze

When exposed to coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass of an insect

When driving in areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or chemical substances

When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and mud

Handwashing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis, be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re- move any mud or road salt from the underside of the vehicle or the wheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild carwash soap, mixed according to the manufacturers instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub hardlet the soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high pressure car wash, for example) at or near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler door opened. If the water enters the air vent, you may experience trouble with re- fueling or rough engine idling.

Rear height control air suspension: Do not spray a jet of highpressure water at the air suspension unit, especially the air spring, at an extremely close range. This may damage the air suspension.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic sub- stances splash an ornament, be sure to wash them off with water and check if the ornament is damaged.

Washing and waxing your Toyota

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

400

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper faces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub them with a hard brush. This may damage the sur- faces of the lights.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces.

3. Rinse thoroughlydried soap can cause streaking. In hot weather you may need to rinse each section right after you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not rub or press hardyou might scratch the paint.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or strong solvents), which may be tox- ic or cause damage.

Do not scrub any part of the ve- hicle with a hard brush, which may cause damage.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto- matic car wash, but remember that the paint can be scratched by some types of brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able to advise you wheth- er the process is safe for the paint on your vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the original beauty of your Toyotas finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be- fore you begin waxing, even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become extremely weath- ered, use a carcleaning polish, fol- lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol- low the manufacturers instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim as well as the paint.

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. If you accidentally put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or wash it off.

3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but remains on the sur- face in large patches.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

401

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers if your vehicle is repainted and placed in a high heat paint waxing booth. High temperatures could damage the bumpers.

CAUTION

Vehicles with side airbags and cur- tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the floor. This may prevent the side airbags and curtain shield airbags from activating cor- rectly, resulting in serious injury.

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle interior or exterior. Water may get into audio components or other electrical components above or un- der the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easily cleaned with a mild soap or detergent and water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re- move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foam- ingtype vinyl cleaners are also available which work well. Follow the manufacturers instructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner on the interior.

Cleaning the interior

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

402

Carpets

Use a good foamtype shampoo to clean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which you mix with water to pro- duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply waterthe best results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the shampoo instructions and follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water or with lukewarm water.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean- ing, check the belts for excessive wear, fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

Do not use dye or bleach on the beltsit may weaken them.

Do not use the belts until they be- come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with any household window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors.

When cleaning the inside of the rear quarter window, be careful not to scratch or damage the printed antenna.

Air conditioning control panel, audio panel, instrument panel, console panel and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke- warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (sol- vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discol- oring, staining or peeling of the surface.

If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances men- tioned above.

If you use a liquid car freshener, do not apill the liquid onto the ve- hicles interior surfaces. It may con- tain the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean any spill using the method mentioned above.

Leather interior

The leather upholstery may be cleaned with neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

403

After cleaning or whenever any part of the leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti- lated shaded area.

NOTICE

If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an organic solvent.

Never use organic substances such as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for clean- ing the leather as these could cause discoloring.

Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.

Mildew may develop on soiled leath- er upholstery. Be especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your upholstery always clean.

Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your ve- hicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.

The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as these tend to stick to leather when warm.

Improper cleaning of the leather up- holstery could result in discolor- ation or staining.

If you have any questions about the cleaning of your Toyota, your local Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer them.

On some models, the outside rear view mirrors have been coated to produce a rain clearing effect. This coating causes the raindrops to spread, clear- ing the drivers rear view when it rains.

It is sufficient to wash the mirrors with water for day to day care.

The rain clearing effect is reduced in drizzle and light rain.

In the following cases, the rain clearing effect will be reduced temporarily, but will gradually recover.

After wiping dirt off the mirrors

When the mirrors fog up

After waxing your vehicle in an auto- matic car wash

After your vehicle has been parked for a long period in underground parking lots, etc. where there is no direct sun- light.

If you would like to restore the rain clear- ing effect to its normal level immediately in the above cases, wash the mirrors with neutral detergent, then rinse thoroughly.

Rain clearing mirrors

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

404

NOTICE

To maintain the rain clearing ability, and prevent the mirrors from being scratched, observe the following pre- cautions.

Do not use any glass cleaners that contain compounds.

If ice should jam the mirror, do not scrape the mirror. Use a spray de icer to free the mirror.

Wash off any wax stuck to the mir- rors with neutral detergent and rinse thoroughly as any wax on the surface of the mirrors can cause the rain clearing effect to be lost.

Do not use any water repellents as they can destroy the rain clearing effect. If any repellent gets stuck on the surface of the mirrors, wash it off with neutral detergent, then rinse thoroughly.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

405

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE Vehicle maintenance and care Maintenance requirements 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 410. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the Sched- uled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

SECTION 6

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

406

Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with long- er service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular mainte- nance, as well as daytoday care, is more important than ever before to ensure smooth, and troublefree, safe, and eco- nomical drivings.

It is the owners responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance service, is performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emis- sion control system warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be per- formed. See Owners Warranty Informa- tion Booklet or Owners Manual Supple- ment for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day today care practices that are important to your vehicle for proper operation. It is the owners responsibility to ensure that the general maintenance items are performed regularly.

These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or a qualified technician, or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement are those required to be serviced at regular inter- vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule, read the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

It is recommended that any replacement parts used for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control system be Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use nonToyota supplied parts for replacement pur- poses without invalidating the emission control system warranty. However, use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effec- tiveness of the emission control sys- tems.

You may also elect to have mainte- nance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and system performed by any automotive repair es- tablishment or individual without invali- dating this warranty. See Owners War- ranty Information Booklet or Owners Manual Supplement for complete war- ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are welltrained spe- cialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and indealership training programs. They learn to work on Toyotas before they work on your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyota dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance require- ments on your vehiclereliably and eco- nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required maintenance has been per- formed for warranty coverage. If any prob- lems should arise with your vehicle while under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it. Again, be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service performed on your Toyota.

What about doityourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little mechani- cal ability and a few basic automotive tools. Simple instructions for how to per- form them are presented on page 411 in Section 7.

Maintenance requirements

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

407

If you are a skilled doityourself mechan- ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom- mended. Please be aware that doityour- self maintenance can affect your warranty coverage. See Owners Warranty Informa- tion Booklet or Owners Manual Supple- ment for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed as fre- quently as specified. In addition to check- ing the items listed, if you notice any unusual noise, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali- fied service shop immediately. It is recom- mended that any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your dealer or the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade- quate ventilation if you run the en- gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checked from time to time, e.g. each time when refueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 437 in Section 73 for additional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is between the F and L lines on the seethrough reservoir when the engine is cold. See page 422 in Section 72 for additional information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 423 in Section 72 for additional information.

Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indica- tor color. See page 434 in Section 73 for additional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 423 in Section 72 for addition- al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 420 in Section 72 for additional information.

General maintenance

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

408

Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. The level should be in the HOT or COLD range depending on the fluid temperature. See page 424 in Section 72 for addition- al information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected immedi- ately. (See Engine exhaust cautions on page 333 in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

Check that all service reminder indicators and warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op- erate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the head restraint move up and down smooth- ly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position. For foldingdown rear seatbacks and swingup rear seat cush- ions (vehicles without third seats), tum- bling second seats (vehicles with third seats), foldingup third seats and detach- able third seats, check that the latches lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and that the pedal has the proper clearance. Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

In a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the pedal has the proper travel and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.

Automatic transmission Park mecha- nism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in P position and all brakes released.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa- ter or other fluid after the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

409

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors including back door operate smoothly and all latches lock se- curely. Make sure the engine hood sec- ondary latch secures the hood from open- ing when the primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressure Check the pressure with a gauge ev- ery two weeks, or at least once a month. See page 425 in Section 72 for additional information. Tire surface and wheel nuts Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive wear. See page 427 in Section 72 for additional in- formation. When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check the nuts for looseness. Tighten them if necessary. Tire rotation Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For sched- uled maintenance information, please refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supple- ment.) See page 429 in Section 72 for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor- mance, sounds, and visual tipoffs that indicate service is needed. Some impor- tant clues are as follows:

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

Appreciable loss of power

Strange engine noises

A leak under the vehicle (however, wa- ter dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked im- mediately.)

Flatlooking tire; excessive tire squeal when cornering; uneven tire wear

Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road

Strange noises related to suspension movement

Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy feeling brake pedal; pedal almost touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side when braking

Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or repair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve- hicle unchecked. It could result in se- rious vehicle damage and possibly personal injury.

Does your vehicle need repairing?

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

410

Some states have vehicle emission in- spection programs which include OBD (OnBoard Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. When the OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving. However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the codes may not be completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently due to temporary mal- function such as a loose fuel tank cap, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test even the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for retesting.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

411

DOITYOURSELF MAINTENANCE Introduction Engine compartment overview 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doityourself service precautions 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7 1

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

412

1. Windshield and back window washer fluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

Engine compartment overview 4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

413

1. Windshield and back window washer fluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Engine oil level dipstick

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

414

Spare fuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in- complete servicing may result in operating problems.

Performing doityourself maintenance during the warranty period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate Toyota Warranty statement for details and suggestions.

This Section gives instructions only for those items that are relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in Section 6, there are still a number of items that must be done by a qualified technician with special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do ityourself maintenance, see Parts and tools on page 416 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work- ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you should be especially careful to ob- serve:

Fuse locations Doityourself service precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

415

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belts. (Removing rings, watches, and ties is advisable.)

Right after driving, the engine compartmentthe engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, power steering fluid reservoir and spark plug boots, etc.will be hot. So be care- ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids and spark plugs may also be hot.

If the engine is hot, do not remove the radiator cap or loosen the drain plugs to prevent burning yourself.

Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al- low open flames around fuel or the battery. Their fumes are flammable.

Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack supporting it. Al- ways use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.

Use eye protection whenever you work on or under your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as in- flammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with it. To re- move used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.

Dispose of used oil and filter only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and fil- ter in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your dealer or a service station for information concerning recycling or disposal.

Be extremely cautious when work- ing on the battery. It contains poi- sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE

Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high currents or volt- ages. Be careful of accidentally causing a short circuit.

Add only Toyota Super Long Life Coolant or similar high quality eth- ylene glycol based nonsilicate, nonamine, nonnitrite, and nonbo- rate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology to fill the radiator. Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 50% cool- ant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45% deionized water (for Canada).

If you spill some of the coolant, be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or paint.

Do not allow dirt or anything else to fall through the spark plug holes.

Do not pry the outer electrode of a spark plug against the center elec- trode.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

416

Use only spark plugs of the speci- fied type. Using other types will cause engine damage, loss of per- formance or radio noise.

Do not reuse iridiumtipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

Do not overfill automatic transmis- sion fluid, or the transmission could be damaged.

Do not drive with the air cleaner filter removed, or excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the wiper frame.

When closing the engine hood, check to see that you have not for- gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform doityourself mainte- nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de- signed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equiva- lent

See page 421 in Section 72 for de- tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

Toyota Super Long Life Coolant or similar high quality ethylene glycol based nonsilicate, nonamine, nonni- trite, and nonborate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology.

Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion- ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45% deionized water (for Canada).

Tools:

Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

Warm water

Baking soda

Grease

Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

Parts and tools

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

417

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

Fuse with same amperage rating as original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

Water

Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

Tools:

Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original (See charts in Re- placing light bulbs on page 438 in Section 73.)

Tools:

Screwdriver

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

418

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

419

DOITYOURSELF MAINTENANCE Engine and Chassis Checking the engine oil level 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 424. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7 2

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

420

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine

With the engine at operating tempera- ture and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle should be on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstickpush it in as far as it will go, or the reading will not be correct.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a rag under the end.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex- haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil on the vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low level, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil in small quantities at a time, checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level between low and full on the dipstick is indicated as follows:

1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)

For the engine oil capacity, see Service specifications on page 447 in Section 8.

When the level reaches within the correct range, install the filler cap handtight.

NOTICE

Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

421

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 5W30 is not available, SAE 10W30 may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W30 at the next oil change.

Oil identification mark

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan- dardization and Approval Committee) Certi- fication Mark is added to some oil con- tainers to help you select the oil you should use.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

422

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor- mance for your engine, Toyota Genuine Motor Oil is available, which has been specifically tested and approved for all Toyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur- ther details about Toyota Genuine Motor Oil.

Look at the seethrough coolant reser- voir when the engine is cold. The cool- ant level is satisfactory if it is between the F and L lines on the reservoir. If the level is low, add the coolant. (For the coolant type, see Coolant type selection described below.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine temperature. However, if the level is on or below the L line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the F line.

If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing, there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain cock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator cap when the en- gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling system.

Only use Toyota Super Long Life Coolant or similar high quality ethylene glycol based nonsilicate, nonamine, nonnitrite, and nonborate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant pro- vides protection down to about 35C (31F).

For CanadaToyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant pro- vides protection down to about 42C (44F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Checking the engine coolant level

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

423

Toyota recommends Toyota Super Long Life Coolant, which has been tested to ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor result in malfunction of your engine coolant system with proper usage. Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is formulated with longlife hybrid organic acid technology and has been specifically designed to avoid engine cooling system malfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condi- tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care- ful not to touch the radiator or con- denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do not perform the work by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look at the seethrough reservoir. The level should be between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious mechanical prob- lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the brake reservoir.

Checking the radiator and condenser Checking brake fluid

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

424

Refilling brake fluid:

1. Turn the ignition switch off.

2. Depress the brake pedal more than 20 times (until the brake pedal resistance decreases and pedal travel increases).

3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand. Add brake fluid up to the MAX line.

If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the af- fected area with clean water immedi- ately. If you still feel uncomfortable with your hands or eyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sure to wipe it off to prevent it from dam- aging the parts or paintwork.

If cold O.K. If hot O.K.

If cold add

If hot add

Close Open

Check the fluid level through the reser- voir. If necessary, add automatic trans- mission fluid DEXRONII or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot (60C80C or 140F175F). You may also check the level when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10C30C or 50F85F) if the engine has not been run for about five hours.

Checking power steering fluid

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

425

Clean all dirt from the outside of the res- ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. If the fluid is cold, the level should be in the COLD range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the HOT range. If the level is at the low side of either range, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III to bring the level within the range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun- terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser- voir cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so be careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer- ing could be damaged.

Keep your tire inflation pressures at the proper level. The recommended cold tire inflation pressures, tire sizes and the com- bined weight of occupants and cargo (vehicle capacity weight) are de- scribed on pages 446 and 451. They are also on the tire and loading infor- mation label. You should check the tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. And do not forget the spare! The following instructions for checking tire inflation pressure should be observed: The pressure should be

checked only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pres- sure reading.

Checking tire inflation pressure

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

426

If you cannot adjust the tire pressure when the tires are cold, add 20 to 30 kPa more to the front tires and rear tires than the cold tire pressure, but never exceed the maximum cold tire pressure molded on the tire side- wall.

Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of a tire can be misleading. Besides, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capac- ity weight. Passenger and lug- gage weight should be located so that the vehicle is balanced.

Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tire valve cap. 2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve. 3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge. 4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range, insert the compressed air from the valve. In case of applying too much air, press the center of the valve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and ad- justment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap. If a gauge and air pump are not avail- able, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have been lost, have new ones put on as soon as pos- sible.

NOTICE

Use only the original valve cap. If any other valve cap is used, it may corrode or melt and be- come difficult or impossible to remove.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

427

Incorrect tire inflation pressure may waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv- ing, reduce tire life and make your ve- hicle less safe to drive. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by your Toyota deal- er.

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following condi- tions may occur and cause an ac- cident resulting in death or seri- ous injuries. Low tire pressure (underinfla- tion) Excessive wear Uneven wear Poor handling Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire Poor sealing of the tire bead

Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla- tion) Poor handling Excessive wear Uneven wear A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES Check the tires tread for tread wear indicators. If the indicators show, replace the tires. The loca- tion of tread wear indicators is shown by the TWI or marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

Checking and replacing tires

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

428

The tires on your Toyota have builtin tread wear indicators to help you know when the tires need replace- ment. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica- tors will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced. The lower the tread, the higher the risk of skidding. The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.). If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indi- cating internal damage, the tire should be replaced. If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond repair. Any tires which are over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious. Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or seldom been used. This applies also to the spare tire and tires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and construction, and the same or greater maximum load as the originally installed tires. Also, on fourwheel drive models, all the tires must be the same brand and have the same tread patterns. Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground clearance, and clearance be- tween the body and tires or snow chains. Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer- tification Label.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

429

For details about the side wall of the tire and the Certification Label, see pages 339 and 342.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc- tions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or biasply tires on your ve- hicle, as this may cause dan- gerous handling characteris- tics resulting in loss of control.

Do not use tires other than the manufacturers recommended size, as this may cause danger- ous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Fourwheel drive models: Do not use tires of different brands, sizes, construction or tread patterns, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires, or at least both of the front or rear tires be replaced at a time as a set. See If you have a flat tire on page 379 for tire change procedure. When a tire is replaced, the wheel should always be balanced. An unbalanced wheel may affect ve- hicle handling and tire life. Wheels can get out of balance with regular use and should therefore be balanced occasionally. When replacing a tubeless tire, the air valve should also be replaced with a new one.

To equalize the wear and help ex- tend tire life, Toyota recommends that you rotate your tires accord- ing to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance infor- mation, please refer to the Sched- uled Maintenance Guide or Own- ers Manual Supplement.) However, the most appropriate tim- ing for tire rotation may vary ac- cording to your driving habits and road surface conditions. See If you have a flat tire on page 379 in Section 4 for tire change proce- dure.

Rotating tires

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

430

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pres- sure, improper wheel alignment, out ofbalance wheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR CHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tires provide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Also, on fourwheel drive models, all the tires must be the same brand and have the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men- tioned above. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur re- sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturers recommended si- ze, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Fourwheel drive models: Do not use snow tires of different brands, sizes, construction or tread patterns, as this may cause danger- ous handling characteristics result- ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheels only can lead to an excessive difference in road grip capability between the front and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you should store them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the same direction when replacing.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.

Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of snow tires.

Installing snow tires and chains

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

431

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location or type of road, so always check local reg- ulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible. Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains after driving 0.51.0 km (1/41/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care- fully follow the instructions of the chain manufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will be scratched by the chain band, so remove the covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain manufacturers recom- mended speed limit, whichever is lower.

Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or lockedwheel braking, as use of chains may ad- versely affect vehicle handling.

When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident may occur.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the wheel or cause loss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that the wheels are re- placed by ones with the same load ca- pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect handling, wheel and bear- ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom- eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear- ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to the body and chassis.

Replacing wheels

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

432

Replacement with used wheels is not rec- ommended as they may have been sub- jected to rough treatment or high mileage and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have been straightened may have structural damage and therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur re- sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use wheels other than the manufacturers recommended size, as this may cause dangerous han- dling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Fourwheel drive models: Do not use wheels of different brands, sizes and types, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km (1000 miles).

If you have rotated, repaired or changed your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).

When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels.

Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrench designed for your aluminum wheels.

When balancing your wheels, use only Toyota balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.

As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

433

DOITYOURSELF MAINTENANCE Electrical components Checking battery condition 434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 436. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7 3

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

434

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable and explosive hydrogen gas.

Do not cause a spark from the bat- tery with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.

Never ingest electrolyte.

Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

Keep children away from the bat- tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately and get immediate medical attention. If possible, con- tinue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while en route to the medi- cal office.

If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contact area. If you feel pain or burning, get medi- cal attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so immediate- ly take off the exposed clothing and follow the procedure above, if nec- essary.

If you accidentally swallow electro- lyte, drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magne- sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go immediately for emer- gency help.

Terminals

Holddown clamp

Ground cable

Check the battery for corroded or loose terminal connections, cracks, or loose holddown clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm water and bak- ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi- nals with grease to prevent further cor- rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose, tighten their clamp nutsbut do not overtighten.

c. Tighten the holddown clamp only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery case.

Checking battery condition Precautions Checking battery exterior

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

435

NOTICE

Be sure the engine and all accesso- ries are off before performing main- tenance.

When checking the battery, remove the ground cable from the negative terminal ( mark) first and rein- stall it last.

Be careful not to cause a short cir- cuit with tools.

Take care no solution gets into the battery when washing it.

If the battery is disconnected or run down, the power window, power back win- dow and moon roof may not operate auto- matically and the jam protection function will not function correctly, and does not open the back door after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normalize the power window, power back window, back door and moon roof. To normalize them, see Power windows on page 27, Power back window on page 30, Back door on page 32 and Electric moon roof on page 39 in Section 12.

Type A

Type B

Green Dark Clear or light yellow

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi- cator color.

Indicator color Condition

Type A Type B

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary. Have battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

Clear or light

yellow Red

Have battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro- ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re- charger is off when connecting the charger cables to the battery and when disconnecting them.

CAUTION

Always charge the battery in an un- confined area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventila- tion.

Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may ex- plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

436

Type A

Type B

Type C

Good Blown

Good

Good

Blown

Blown

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work, check the fuses. If any of the fuses are blown, they must be replaced.

See Fuse locations on page 414 in Sec- tion 71 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperative component off. Pull the suspected fuse straight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse. See page 452 in Section 8 for the functions controlled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by using the pullout tool. The location of the pull out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse has blown, try replacing the suspected fuse with one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse into the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat- ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull out the PWR OUTLET or HEATER NO.2 fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper- age, use one that is lower, but as close to the rating as possible. If the amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them in your ve- hicle for emergencies.

Checking and replacing fuses

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

437

If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with the electrical sys- tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am- perage rating, or any other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause ex- tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does not work, the wash- er tank may be empty. Check the wash- er fluid level on the level gauge. If the washer fluid level is below LOW or only slightly above the LOW level, add washer fluid.

For vehicles sold in Canada If any washer does not work or low windshield washer fluid level warning light comes on, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold areas where tempera- tures range below the freezing point, use washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at your Toyota dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturers directions for how much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may dam- age your vehicles paint.

Adding washer fluid

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

438

The following illustrations show how to gain access to the bulbs. When replacing a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and light switch are off. Use bulbs with the wattage ratings given in the table.

The stop/tail and rear side marker lights consist of a number of LEDs. If two or more LEDs burn out, your vehicle may not conform to local laws (SAE). If this oc- curs, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs while they are hot.

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and require special handling. They can burst or shatter if scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is caused by the temperature difference between the outside and inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your Toyota dealer.

Replacing light bulbs

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

439

A: HB3 halogen bulbs B: H11 halogen bulbs C: HB4 halogen bulbs D: Wedge base bulbs (amber) E: Single end bulbs F: Wedge base bulbs (clear) G: Double end bulbs

9005

TypeWBulb No.Light bulbs

Headlights (high beam)

Headlights (low beam)

Front fog lights

Parking and front side marker lights

Front turn signal lights

Rear turn signal lights

Backup lights

License plate lights

High mounted stoplight

Interior light

Personal lights

Vanity lights

Door courtesy lights

Glove box light

Luggage compartment light

Running board lights

9006

168

921

921

168

1156NA

60

55

51

5

27

21

18

5

18

8

5

3

3.8

1.2

8

3.8

A

B

C

D

E

D

F

F

F

G

F

G

F

F

G

F

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

440

Low beam (outside)

High beam (inside)

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise to the front of the vehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depress- ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connector into the mounting hole and turn them clockwise to the front of the vehicle.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec- essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

Headlights

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

441

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise to the front of the vehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depress- ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connector into the mounting hole and turn them clockwise to the front of the vehicle.

Front fog lights

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

442

Use a flathead screwdriver which is wrapped with a cloth.

Parking and front side marker lights Front turn signal lights

Rear turn signal and backup lights

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

443

a: Rear turn signal light b: Backup light

Use a Phillipshead screwdriver.

Clips

Disconnect the clips by using a flathead screwdriver which is wrapped with a cloth.

License plate lights High mounted stoplight

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

444

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

445

SPECIFICATIONS Specifications Dimensions and weights 446. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

446

Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight), kg (lb.):

For weight carrying hitch 2268 (5000)

Also for weight distributing hitch (4.7 L V8 [2UZFE] engine only)

Twowheel drive models 3311 (7300)

Fourwheel drive models 3175 (7000)

Dimensions and weights

Overall width mm (in.)

2790 (109.8)

Overall height1 mm (in.)

1575 (62.0)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.) 1575 (62.0)

Rear tread mm (in.)

431 (950)7

476 (1050)8

1: Unladen vehicle 2: Twowheel drive models 3: Fourwheel drive models 4: With roof rails 5: With rear spoiler 6: With rear height control air suspension 7: With 5 occupants 8: With 7 occupants

Overall length mm (in.)

Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) kg (lb.)

4805 (189.2)

1910 (75.2)

1820 (71.7)2 or 3, 4

1800 (70.9)2, 3, 5

1755 (69.1)2, 3

1805 (71.1)2 or 3, 4, 6

1785 (70.3)2 or 3, 5, 6

1740 (68.5)2 or 3, 6

91 (200)7

0 (0)8Luggage compartment load capacity kg (lb.)

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

447

Model: 1GRFE and 2UZFE

Type: 1GRFE engine

6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline 2UZFE engine

8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.): 1GRFE engine

94.0 95.0 (3.70 3.74) 2UZFE engine

94.0 84.0 (3.70 3.31)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.): 1GRFE engine 3956 (241.4) 2UZFE engine 4664 (284.5)

Fuel type: Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. For improved vehicle performance, use premium unleaded gasoline with an Oc- tane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.): 87 (23.0, 19.1)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine Intake 0.150.25 (0.0060.010) Exhaust 0.290.39 (0.0110.015)

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine Intake 0.150.25 (0.0060.010) Exhaust 0.250.35 (0.0100.014)

Spark plug type:

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine DENSO K20HRU11 NGK LFR6C11

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine DENSO SK20R11 NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.): 1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine With filter 5.2 (5.5, 4.6) Without filter 4.9 (5.2, 4.3)

4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine With filter 6.2 (6.5, 5.5) Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

Engine Fuel Service specifications

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

448

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W30

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur- ther details.

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): 4.0 L V6 (1GRFE) engine

9.8 (10.4, 8.6) 4.7 L V8 (2UZFE) engine

12.3 (13,0, 10.8)

Coolant type:

Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is used in your Toyota vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use Toyota Super Long Life Coolant or similar high quality ethylene glycol based nonsilicate, nonamine, nonnitrite, and nonborate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)

Do not use plain water alone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

BATTERY

Open voltage at 20C (68F): 12.612.8 V Fully charged 12.212.4 V Half charged 11.812.0 V Discharged

: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af- ter the key is removed with all the lights turned off

Charging rates: 5 A max.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

449

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

Fluid type: Toyota Genuine ATF WS

Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special Operating Conditions listed in your Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement. When changing the automatic transmission fluid, use only Toyota Genuine ATF WS (ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring optimum transmission performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Toyota Genuine ATF WS may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimate- ly damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur- ther details.

TRANSFER

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): 1.4 (1.5, 1.2)

Oil type: Hypoid gear oil API GL5

Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 75W90

DIFFERENTIAL (4.0 L V6 [1GRFE] en- gine)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Twowheel drive models 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Fourwheel drive models Front 1.5 (1.6, 1.3) Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Oil type: Hypoid gear oil API GL5

Recommended oil viscosity: Front

SAE 75W90

Rear Above 18C (0F)

SAE 90 Below 18C (0F)

SAE 80W or 80W90

DIFFERENTIAL (4.7 L V8 [2UZFE] en- gine)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Twowheel drive models 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Fourwheel drive models Front 1.4 (1.5, 1.2) Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Oil type: Hypoid gear oil API GL5

Recommended oil viscosity:

Above 18C (0F) SAE 90

Below 18C (0F) SAE 80W or 80W90

CHASSIS LUBRICATION

Propeller shafts:

Spiders Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Slide yokes Molybdenumdisulfide lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 or lithium base multipurpose grease, NLGI No.2

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

450

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf) with the engine running, mm (in.):

54 (2.1)

Pedal free play, mm (in.): 16 (0.040.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf):

57 clicks

Fluid type: SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play: Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

451

Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:

Tire size Cold tire inflation pressure

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel size Front Rear Spare

P265/70R16 111S 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 16 7J1

16 7JJ2

P265/65R17 110S 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 17 7 1/2JJ

P265/60R18 109H 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 18 7 1/2J 1: Vehicles with steel wheels 2: Vehicles with aluminum wheels NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see Checking tire inflation pres-

sure through Aluminum wheel precautions, pages 425 through 432 in Section 72. Wheel nut torque, Nm (kgfm, ftlbf):

110 (11.5, 83)

Tires

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

452

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse

2. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse

3. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, high mounted stoplight, shift lock control system, antilock brake system, trac- tion control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), vehicle sta- bility control system, rear height control air suspension, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injec- tion system, trailer brake controller, trailer lights (tail lights)

Instrument panel

4. AC115V INV 15 A: AC inverter

5. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

6. OBD 7.5 A: Onboard diagnosis sys- tem

7. HEAD (LO RH) 10 A: Righthand headlight (low beam)

8. HEAD (LO LH) 10 A: Lefthand head- light (low beam)

9. HEAD (HI RH) 10 A: Righthand head- light (high beam)

10. HEAD (HI LH) 10 A: Lefthand head- light (high beam)

11. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injec- tion system

12. HEATER NO.2 7.5 A: Air conditioning system

13. AIRSUS NO.2 10 A: Rear height con- trol air suspension

14. SEAT HEATER 25 A: Seat heaters

15. DEFOG 30 A: Back window defogger, multiport fuel injection system/sequen- tial multiport fuel injection system

16. MIR HEATER 10 A: Outside rear view mirror heater

17. DOME 10 A: Interior light, personal lights, wireless remote control system, door courtesy lights, gauge and meter, vanity lights, instrument panel lights, running board lights, multiplex commu- nication system

18. RADIO NO.1 20 A: Audio system, nav- igation system, rear seat entertainment system

Fuses

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

453

19. ECUB 10 A: Antilock brake system, traction control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), ve- hicle stability control system, air condi- tioning system, multiplex communica- tion system, theft deterrent system, driving position memory system, front passenger occupant classification sys- tem

20. ALTS 7.5 A: Charging system

21. HORN 10 A: Horns

22. A/F HEATER 15 A: A/F sensor

23. TRNHAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights, emergency flashers

24. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injec- tion system

25. EFI 20 A: Multiport fuel injection sys- tem/sequential multiport fuel injection system

26. DR/LCK 20 A: Power door lock system

27. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter

28. RADIO NO.2 20 A: Audio system

29. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys- tem/sequential multiport fuel injection system, antilock brake system, trac- tion control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), vehicle sta- bility control system, meter and gauge, front passenger occupant classification system

30. SRS 10 A: SRS airbag system

31. GAUGE 7.5 A: Meter and gauge

32. STA NO.2 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injec- tion system/sequential multiport fuel in- jection system

33. FR WIPWSH 30 A: Windshield wipers and washer

34. 4WD 20 A: Fourwheel drive control system

35. D P/SEAT 30 A: Drivers power seat

36. P P/SEAT 30 A: Front passengers power seat

37. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

38. RR WSH 15 A: Back window washer, multiplex communication system

39. ECUIG 10 A: Shift lock control sys- tem, power windows, antilock brake system, traction control system (two wheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive mod- els), vehicle stability control system, electric moon roof, multiplex commu- nication system, theft deterrent system, rear height control air suspension, tire pressure warning system, driving posi- tion memory system

40. IG1 15 A: Antilock brake system, traction control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), ve- hicle stability control system, air condi- tioning system, charging system, back window defogger, backup lights, emer- gency flashers, seat heaters, AC invert- er, instrument panel light control, auto antiglare inside rear view mirror, seat belt tension reducer

41. STA 7.5 A: No circuit

42. SECU/HORN 10 A: Theft deterrent sys- tem

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

454

43. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plate lights, parking lights, instrument panel light control, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injec- tion system, instrument panel lights, meter and gauge, grove box light

44. ACC 7.5 A: Power outlets, outside rear view mirrors, audio system, navigation system, shift lock control system, in- strument panel lights, rear seat enter- tainment system

45. CIG 10 A: No circuit

Fuses (type B)

46. A/PUMP 50 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injec- tion system

47. AIRSUS 50 A: Rear height control air suspension

48. AM1 50 A: All components in ACC, CIG, IG1, ECUIG, FR WIP WSH, RRWSH, 4WD, and STA fuses

49. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake con- troller

50. J/B 50 A: All components in PWR OUTLET, D P/SEAT, P P/SEAT, POWER, TAIL and SECU/HORN fuses

51. BATT CHG 30 A: Trailer sub battery

52. TOWING 40 A: Trailer lights (tail lights)

53. ABS MTR 40 A: Antilock brake sys- tem, traction control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), ve- hicle stability control system

54. AM2 30 A: Starter system, IGN, GAUGE, STA NO.2 and SRS fuses

55. ABS SOL 30 A: Antilock brake sys- tem, traction control system (twowheel drive models), active traction control system (fourwheel drive models), ve- hicle stability control system

56. POWER 30 A: Power windows, electric moon roof

Fuses (type C)

57. ALT 140 A: All components in A/PUMP, AIRSUS, AM1, TOWING BRK, J/B, BATT CHG, TOWING, TAIL, STOP, AC 115V INV, FR FOG, OBD, DEFOG and MIR HEATER fuses

58. HEATER 60 A: Air conditioning system

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

455

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

456

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately in- form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 18003314331).

If NHTSA receives similar com- plaints, it may open an investiga- tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of ve- hicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may ei- ther call the Auto Safety Hotline tollfree at 18004249393 (or 3660123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hot- line.

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

I

Publication No. OM35852U Part No. 01999-35852 Printed in Japan 01050800

4

Quick index

If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 147. . . . . . . .

If your vehicle will not start 374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your engine stalls while driving 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle overheats 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have a flat tire 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle needs to be towed 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for driving during breakin period 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to start the engine 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. For improved vehicle performance, use premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher.

See page 329 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)

Engine oil: ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 421 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 425 through 432.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 451.

U1

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

Comfortable

Easy to use

Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in top running order is to maintain it properly from the moment you drive it off the showroom floor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is packed with literally everything you need to know to perform your own maintenance in virtually every area of your new vehicle.

06 4Runner_U (L/O 0508)

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for 4RUNNER may be pur-

chased from any Toyota dealer or the Material

Distribution Center. To purchase the repair

manual, please contact your Toyota dealer or call the Material Distribution Center tollfree at

18006222033.

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 4Runner Toyota works, you can view and download the Toyota 4Runner 2006 SUV Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Toyota 4Runner as well as other Toyota manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Toyota 4Runner. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Toyota 4Runner 2006 SUV Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Toyota 4Runner 2006 SUV Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Toyota 4Runner 2006 SUV Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Toyota 4Runner 2006 SUV Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Toyota 4Runner 2006 SUV Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.